Top Banner
i Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow Moulded Containers Requiring Thermal Stability at Elevated Temperatures A thesis submitted in fulfilment of the requirements for a Master Degree in Manufacturing Engineering by Research By Mr Joseph Patuto School of Mechanical and Manufacturing Engineering RMIT University Victoria, Australia
279

Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Jan 21, 2023

Download

Documents

Khang Minh
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

i

Investigation of Recycled PET and Its

Application for Blow Moulded Containers

Requiring Thermal Stability at Elevated

Temperatures

A thesis submitted in fulfilment of the requirements for a

Master Degree in Manufacturing Engineering by

Research

By

Mr Joseph Patuto

School of Mechanical and Manufacturing Engineering

RMIT University

Victoria, Australia

Page 2: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

ii

Acknowledgements

I begin my acknowledgements to the person who worked as hard and was as

challenged as I had been during my studies, my wife Silvana. You have taught me

patience; you have shown me the meaning of commitment, as you have supported me

during this time of part-time study and full-time employment. Our four children are

blessed to have you as their mother, and I praised the Lord Jesus for your dedication

and love to us all each day. Your leadership has taught me to demonstrate my love to

you in practical ways, and having an action love for you, not just in word. You are

more than my wife. You are where God speaks these words “For this reason a man

will leave his father and mother and be united to his wife, and they will become one

flesh.” Genesis 2:24. Silvana, I love you. Thank you for serving the LORD.

Secondly, I thank my children, Priscilla, Nathanael, Jonah and Elijah. You have given

up so much for your dad to do this project, and to complete it. I cannot thank enough

the Lord Jesus in words expressing my feelings for your patience and understanding,

even at this young and tender age. I wish to serve you and to be a standing stone, a

living testimony to you for years to come.

I wish to thank the team of people who supported me during my tenure. To Dr. Fugen

Daver, who took a chance on me to undertake this project; I have enjoyed working

with you. I thank you for your tenacity, your direction and trust, which you

demonstrated in me during this project. You were always interested in my trials,

concerned for my progress and listened to my difficulties in raising a family,

supporting my wife, and being a father and friend to my children during this tenure.

Page 3: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

iii

You gave me latitude even though you may have not been certain of the outcome.

You have allowed me to learn and to continue my education and for that I thank you.

I also wish to thank Adjunct Professor Edward Kosior, who gave me an opportunity

to undertake this project, and supported me as my industry consultant. I respect your

ability and professionalism, and the example you have given the polymer and

packaging industry. Your work ethic and value in people is unquestionable. And your

concern for the environment will be remembered for many years.

I thank Dr. Chris Friedl who has aided me in difficult areas. You have been patient

with me, and were able to break down complex ideas for my comprehension. There

was never a time that was an inconvenience to you. I thank you for your feedback on

my thesis and your direction during my practical experiments and thesis writing. You

have spent valuable time with me, and for this I give you thanks. You are not boastful

concerning your knowledge and ability, and yet at any given time were prepared to

share your knowledge. You have assisted me in my learning and education. Thank

you!

I thank Peter Tkatchyk and Terry Rosewarne for their assistance in my laboratory

pracs and ISBM experiment set-ups. I also wish to thank Tracey Hanely from

ANSTO, who conducted all SAXS experiments. I also wish to thank Dr. Ferenc Cser,

whose tutelage concerning TMDSC experiments and data interpretation was

invaluable. Also to Steve Shamis from Waters Australia, who supported me with key

contacts for TMDSC and rheological experiments.

Page 4: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

iv

I wish to acknowledge MoldFlow Australia, for allowing myself to perform density

measurements. Furthermore a sincere thanks to Visy Plastic for the supply of all PET

materials used for this research study. I also wish to thank Graeme Moad from CSIRO

for conducting the rheological tests. I also thank our family friend Barbara

Gottliebsen for the initial editing of this thesis. I also thank my employer, Kangan

Batman TAFE for giving me great latitude and time to undertake these studies.

My final acknowledgement is to the Lord Jesus Christ, through whom all things

blessings do flow. With much pray, and your leading you have given me the strength,

patience, endurance and the commitment to complete this project. There were times

when I wished to give up, as I felt the inadequacy in my role as a husband, and father

and friend to my children and wife. But you reminded me of my calling, and the

reasons for undertaking this project. Lord Jesus, I love you and I wish this thesis is to

be used to your Glory. AMEN.

Page 5: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

v

Declaration

I, Joseph Patuto herby certify that the work embodied in this thesis is the result of

original research and has not been submitted for higher degree to any other

University or Institution.

__________________

Joseph Patuto

Page 6: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

vi

Conference Proceedings

Recycled Poly (ethylene terephthalate) (PET) Blends for Hot - fill Bottles

(Patuto et al. 2007)

Abstract Injection stretch blow moulded PET bottles offer glass like clarity, excellent gas

barrier properties and good overall mechanical strength. However, PET bottles

required for hot - fill (85 oC) applications have encountered limitations due to the

relatively low glass transition temperature of PET.

In this study, three different PET materials are blended with post consumer recycled

PET. The heat-setting technique is used for the manufacture of injection stretch blow

moulded bottles for ‘hot - fill’ applications. The process parameters (preform

temperature, heat-setting timing and blow mould temperature) and the material blend

ratios for PET bottles are optimised based on thermal and mechanical

characterisation.

Page 7: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

vii

Abstract

Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET) has become the preferred material of choice for

many packaging applications. A preference over glass due to its low weight, similar

transparency to glass and cost consideration, including the availability of recycled

PET feedstock via kerbside collection has provided newer opportunities for hot-fill

applications. Ostensibly, this material is used for beverage markets requiring cold and

hot filling (85 oC) of liquid foods. However due to the poor thermal stability of PET –

due to its low glass transition temperature – an increase in elevated temperatures

limits the number of market segments the material can be utilised.

Current practices incorporate the heat-set process, aimed at improving the

crystallisation kinetics within the amorphous and crystalline region. This body of

work incorporates a single stage Injection Stretch Blow Moulding machine (ISBM).

Modifications to conventional carbonated soft drink (CSD) beverage containers to

include heat-set capabilities are incorporated.

The current research study investigates the potential benefits of RPET blends for

improving thermal stability at elevated temperatures. This study investigates changes

in mechanical properties which include

• Youngs modulus,

• top load strength,

• burst strength,

• Thermal analysis specifically investigating changes in

• Glass transition temperature,

Page 8: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

viii

• enthalpy changes due to heat-set conditions

• Percentage crystallinity changes as a function of heat-set conditions

Rheological characteristics to all materials used were investigates. Furthermore,

changes in the physical properties to each PET beverage container were

investigated which include;

• process shrinkage (S1),

• hot-fill shrinkage (S2)

• Density changes via optimised DoE parameters.

A combination of cold (80 oC) and hot moulds (150

oC) as measured via Forward

Looking Infrared (FLIR) at the exterior to the blow mould and their affect on

percentage crystallinity was studied. Preform surface temperature (PST) and strain

induced crystallinity, assisting in molecular relaxation is analysed.

Upon completion to an exhaustive experimental ISBM trial, a DoE software package

– in this case Echip – was used to analyse and predict optimised hot-fill shrinkage

values of 2.5 percent with a maximum constrained RPET blend value totalling 40

percent. ISBM optimised conditions demonstrated advantages when combining an

increased preform surface temperature, RPET blends and optimised ISBM process

conditions as indicated via the DoE at low heat-set temperatures.

Page 9: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

ix

Table of Contents

Acknowledgements........................................................................................................ii

Declaration.....................................................................................................................v

Conference Proceedings................................................................................................vi

Abstract ........................................................................................................................vii

Table of Contents..........................................................................................................ix

List of Figures .................................................................................................................i

List of Tables ..................................................................................................................i

List of Equations .......................................................................................................... iii

1. Chapter 1: Introduction ..........................................................................................1

1.1. Introduction........................................................................................................2

1.2. Overview of recycling........................................................................................3

1.3. Heat-set technologies .........................................................................................5

1.4. Project aim .........................................................................................................6

1.5. Research Questions............................................................................................7

1.6. Contribution to new knowledge.........................................................................8

2. Chapter 2: Literature Review.................................................................................9

2.1. Introduction......................................................................................................10

2.2. Market Sector...................................................................................................13

2.3. Bottle Design Developments ...........................................................................14

2.4. Material Developments....................................................................................15

Page 10: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

x

2.5. Material Distribution by Type .........................................................................16

2.6. PET Synthesis ..................................................................................................18

2.6.1. Synthesis of PEIT ........................................................................................24

2.6.2. Heat-set Materials ........................................................................................27

2.6.3. Synthesis of PC-PET....................................................................................29

2.6.4. Melt Recovery of PET .................................................................................30

2.6.5. Glycolysis ....................................................................................................32

2.7. Mechanical Testing..........................................................................................35

2.7.1. Izod Impact Test. .........................................................................................35

2.7.2. Tensile Testing.............................................................................................36

2.8. Rheological Characteristics .............................................................................37

2.8.1. Parallel Plate Rheometer..............................................................................38

2.9. Dilute Solution Viscosity.................................................................................39

2.9.1. Melt Flow Index Test...................................................................................42

2.10. Thermal Analysis .........................................................................................44

2.10.1. Crystallinity measured via Differential Scanning Calorimetry ...................44

2.10.2. Temperature Modulated Differential Scanning Calorimetry.......................45

2.10.3. Molecular Weight Distribution ....................................................................49

2.11. Crystallinity and Density .............................................................................49

2.12. Heat-set Process ...........................................................................................51

2.13. Mechanical response via Strain Induced Crystallinity.................................55

Page 11: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

xi

2.14. Morphology of PET Beverage Bottles.........................................................56

3. Chapter 3: Materials, Sample Preparation and Experimental Set-up ..................60

3.1. Introduction......................................................................................................61

3.2. Materials for Heat Set Applications.................................................................62

3.3. Raw Material Preparation ................................................................................64

3.4. Material dying conditions for PET ..................................................................64

3.5. Sample preparation of compression moulded plaque ......................................64

3.6. Rheological characterisation............................................................................67

3.6.1. Analysis intrinsic viscosity of PET..............................................................67

3.6.2. Melt flow index test .....................................................................................68

3.6.3. Parallel Plate Rheometer..............................................................................69

3.7. Thermal characterisation..................................................................................70

3.7.1. Temperature modulated differential scanning calorimetry..........................70

3.8. Mechanical characterisation.............................................................................72

3.8.1. Injection Moulding.......................................................................................73

3.8.2. Izod Impact Test ..........................................................................................74

3.8.3. Tensile Testing.............................................................................................74

3.8.4. Top Load Testing.........................................................................................75

4. Chapter 4: ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation ..76

4.1 ISBM Experimental Set-up..............................................................................77

4.2. Heat-set Capabilities of ISBM.........................................................................79

Page 12: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

xii

4.2.1. Validation of Heat Set Mould Temperatures ...............................................84

4.3. ISBM Bottle Production Set-up .......................................................................87

4.3.1. Heat-set Bottle Production...........................................................................87

4.3.2. Infrared Camera Set-up................................................................................90

4.4. Carbonated Soft Drink Bottle Configuration (CSD) .......................................92

4.5. Sample Selection for Analysis .........................................................................93

4.6. Thermal Stability at Elevated Temperature Characterisation..........................94

4.6.1. Volume Capacity Determination .................................................................94

4.6.2. Hot-fill Procedure ........................................................................................95

4.7. Burst Strength Test ..........................................................................................97

4.8. Wall Thickness Measurement Procedure.........................................................97

4.9. Mechanical Characterisation............................................................................99

4.9.1. Top Load Procedure.....................................................................................99

4.9.2. Tensile test panel section ...........................................................................100

4.10. Density measurement spot panel procedure ..............................................101

4.11. Density measurement panel section procedure..........................................102

5. Chapter 5: Design of Experiment ......................................................................104

5.1. Introduction....................................................................................................105

5.2. Design of Experiment ....................................................................................106

5.3. Contour 1-D Plots ..........................................................................................108

5.3.1. Pareto Effects to Initial DoE......................................................................113

Page 13: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

xiii

5.4. Contour 2-D plots ..........................................................................................117

5.5. Results summary table augmented results .....................................................123

5.6.1. Results contour 1-D augmented DoE plots................................................124

5.6.2. Results contour 2-D augmented plots ........................................................126

5.7. DoE Optimised Condition for ISBM Process................................................129

5.8. Optimised DoE heat-set temperatures ...........................................................132

5.8.1. Optimised heat-set conditions....................................................................132

5.8.2. Optimised heat-set conditions via Goal Seek parameters..........................133

5.8.3. Optimised heat-set conditions via trade off constraints.............................136

5.9. Validation of Optimised ISBM DoE..............................................................137

6. Chapter 6: Heat-set thermal analysis and characterisation. ...............................138

6.1 Thermal Analysis ...........................................................................................139

6.2. Glass Transition .............................................................................................140

6.3. Integration limits via extrapolation method...................................................141

6.4. Initial crystallinity via TMDSC method ........................................................144

6.5. Density Measurements...................................................................................146

6.6. Validation of Tg Temperature using DMTA..................................................147

6.7. Morphological analysis of heat-set containers...............................................148

7. Chapter 7: Results and Discussions ...................................................................152

7.1. Mechanical Properties for PET samples used................................................153

7.1.1. Comparative Results for Maximum Yield stress. ......................................153

Page 14: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

xiv

7.1.2. Comparative Results for Young Modulus .................................................154

7.1.3. Comparative Results for Elongation at break ............................................155

7.1.4. Izod Impact test..........................................................................................156

7.2. Rheological properties ...................................................................................157

7.2.1. Intrinsic Viscosity ......................................................................................157

7.2.2. Parallel Plate Complex Viscosity data.......................................................158

7.2.3. Polydispersity Index determination. ..........................................................160

7.2.4. Storage Modulus via Parallel plate ............................................................161

7.2.5. Loss Modulus via Parallel plate Rheometer ..............................................162

7.3. Optimisation via Augmented DoE.................................................................163

7.3.1. Preform Surface Temperature....................................................................163

7.3.2. Process Shrinkage (S1)...............................................................................168

7.4. Targeted Optimisation via Augmented DoE..................................................171

7.4.1. Hot-fill shrinkage (S2)................................................................................171

7.4.2. Burst Test ...................................................................................................177

7.4.3. Panel Wall thickness ..................................................................................181

7.4.4. Top load strength .......................................................................................182

7.5. Mechanical Properties via Optimised DoE....................................................184

7.5.1. Elastic Modulus of Panel section via Optimised DoE...............................184

7.5.2. Tensile Strength of Panel section via Optimised DoE...............................186

7.6. Dimensional Stability via Optimised DoE.....................................................187

Page 15: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

xv

7.6.1. Process Shrinkage (S1) results ...................................................................187

7.6.2. Hot-fill Shrinkage (S2) results....................................................................189

7.6.3. Burst test results via optimised DoE..........................................................192

7.7. Thermal Analysis. ..........................................................................................194

7.7.1. Glass transition temperature via TMDSC..................................................194

7.7.2. Percentage Crystallinity via Optimised DoE. ............................................198

7.8. Density results via Optimised DoE................................................................199

7.9. DMTA Analysis.............................................................................................202

7.10. Orientation assessment via SAXS .............................................................204

8. Chapter 8. Conclusion and recommendation for further research work............206

8.1. Conclusions....................................................................................................207

8.1.1. Critical factors controlling thermal stability ..............................................207

8.1.2. Optimum process conditions for Single Stage ISBM................................208

8.1.3. Thermal stability and material integrity via RPET inclusion ....................209

8.2. Recommendations for Further Work .............................................................211

References..................................................................................................................213

Appendices.................................................................................................................224

Page 16: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

i

List of Figures Figure 1.2-1 Flow diagram to the recycling of PC-PET to palletised RPET.................5

Figure 2.5-1 Material Distribution from SSP .............................................................16

Figure 2.6-1 Polymerisation Process via Transesterification reaction for PET

Synthesis ......................................................................................................................21

Figure 2.6-2 Polymerisation Process via esterification reaction for PET Synthesis...21

Figure 2.6.1-1 An example of Isosorbide structure (Khanarian et al. 2000c) .............24

Figure 2.6.1-2 Stereochemistry reaction used by DuPont for the manufacture of PEIT

(Storebeck et al. 1996).................................................................................................26

Figure 2.6.5-1 Depolymerisation of PC-PET via Glycolysis reaction (Scheirs 1998) 33

Figure 2.6.5-2 Stereochemistry reaction of DMT extraction from Polymerisation of

PET via Glycolysis reaction.........................................................................................34

Figure 3.8.3-1Schematic of tensile bar used for all tensile testing ..............................75

Figure 4.2-1 Schematic of heater cartridge location with reference to the 375 ml blow

moulding cavity ...........................................................................................................81

Figure 4.2.1-1 Set-point temperature versus actual mould temperature to validate of

electrical heater cartridge installation for heat set temperature control .......................87

Figure 4.4-1 Schematic of 375 ml panel-less, ribless PET container used for ISBM

bottle production and Hot fill experiments. .................................................................93

Figure 4.6.2-1 Standard code letters reference to neck dimension for 375 ml CSD

beverage container .......................................................................................................96

Figure 4.8-1 Wall thickness bottle location along axial length and circumference of

PET beverage container ...............................................................................................98

Figure 4.9.1-1 A sample graph for top – load test results..........................................100

Page 17: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

ii

Figure 4.9.2-1 Tensile Tests panel section taken from PET beverage container panel

....................................................................................................................................101

Figure 4.10-1 Panel section cut out for all density measurements from localised area.

....................................................................................................................................102

Figure 4.11-1 Panel section cut out for all density measurements from entire panel

section. .......................................................................................................................103

Figure 5.3-1 Contour 1-D plot for hot-fill shrinkage against mould temperature .....109

Figure 5.3-2 Contour 1-D plots from Initial DoE for hot-fill and blow time ............110

Figure 5.3-3 Contour 1-D plots from Initial DoE for hot-fill versus preform cooling

time ............................................................................................................................111

Figure 5.3.1-1 Pareto effects chart for hot-fill shrinkage...........................................114

Figure 5.3.1-2 Pareto affects charts for Process Shrinkage (S1). ...............................115

Figure 5.3.1-3 Pareto affects charts from initial DoE for Absolute Shrinkage (St) ..115

Figure 5.3.1-4 Pareto affects charts from initial DoE for Burst Test (BS) ................116

Figure 5.3.1-5 Pareto affects charts from initial DoE for Top-load (TLS)................116

Figure 5.4-1 Outside design Contour 2-D plot for hot-fill shrinkage and Mould

temperature ................................................................................................................118

Figure 5.4-2 Hot-fill shrinkage optimised 2-D Contour plot post outside design .....118

Figure 5.4-3 Outside design Contour 2-D plot for process shrinkage and preform

cooling time. ..............................................................................................................119

Figure 5.4-4 Process shrinkage optimised 2-D Contour plot post outside design .....120

Figure 5.6.1-1 Contour 1-D plot for hot-fill shrinkage against mould temperature ..124

Figure 5.6.1-2 Contour 1-D plot for hot-fill shrinkage and preform cooling time ....125

Figure 5.6.1-3 Pareto effects augmented chart for hot-fill shrinkage ........................126

Page 18: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

iii

Figure 5.6.2-1 Augmented 2-D Interaction plots for hot-fill shrinkage against mould

temperature and blow time.........................................................................................127

Figure 5.6.2-2 Augmented 2-D Interaction plots for hot-fill shrinkage against mould

temperature and preform cooling time.......................................................................128

Figure 5.7-1 Hot-fill shrinkage results obtained via augmented DoE presenting all S2

results below 5 percent shrinkage, measuring a total of 40 percent of all data points

including repeats ........................................................................................................130

Figure 5.7-2 Process shrinkage as a function of heat-set temperatures. ....................131

Figure 5.8.1-1 Response graph demonstrating Optimum point for Heat-set

Application.................................................................................................................133

Figure 5.8.2-1 Burst strength (BS), S2 and top – load results observed without

constraints. .................................................................................................................135

Figure 5.8.3-1 Results from constraint values for burst, S2 and top load results

observed from Echip. .................................................................................................136

Figure 6.2-1 Derivative reversing heat capacity curve for optimised heat-set BB7755

– RPET blend.............................................................................................................141

Figure 6.3-1Example integration limits procedure used for thermal analysis

investigation for optimised heat-set PET beverage containers. .................................142

Figure 6.3-2 Thermograph for optimised heat-set 120 oC 60 % BB7755 – 40 % RPET

extrapolation method .................................................................................................144

Figure 6.7-1 Schematic layout indicating beam direction for all SAXS measurements

indicating hoop and axial direction of panel section .................................................149

Figure 6.7-2 A typical SAXS 2D scattering pattern example for panel section for

optimised DoE 60 % BB7755 – 40 % RPET.............................................................151

Page 19: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

iv

Figure 7.1.1-1Tensile test results demonstrating yield stress (max) for all PET

samples used in this study..........................................................................................154

Figure 7.1.2-1Comparative Young’s modulus results to all PET samples via tensile

testing before heat-set analysis. .................................................................................155

Figure 7.1.3-1Comparative elongation at break results to all PET samples via tensile

testing before heat-set analysis. .................................................................................156

Figure 7.1.4-1Izod impact results for PET materials.................................................157

Figure 7.2.2-1 Complex viscosity measurements results via parallel plate Rheometer

for Voridian CA 12, SkyPET BB7755 and Visy RPET. ...........................................159

Figure 7.2.4-1. Storage modulus comparisons results via parallel plate Rheometer for

Voridian CA 12, SkyPET BB7755 and Visy RPET. .................................................161

Figure 7.2.5-1 Loss modulus results via parallel plate Rheometer for Voridian CA 12,

SkyPET BB7755 and Visy RPET..............................................................................162

Figure 7.3.1-1 Perform surface temperature recorded at point 3 (base). ...................165

Figure 7.3.1-2 Perform surface temperature recorded at point 01 (top of bottle

shoulder). ...................................................................................................................167

Figure 7.3.1-3 Perform surface temperature recorded at point 02 (panel section). ..167

Figure 7.3.2-1 Top 4 performing process shrinkage (S1) results via Augmented DoE

....................................................................................................................................169

Figure 7.3.2-2 High process shrinkage (S1) for Augmented DoE .............................171

Figure 7.4.1-1 Best performing hot-fill shrinkage values via Augmented DoE........172

Figure 7.4.1-2 Worst performing hot-fill shrinkage values via Augmented DoE .....173

Figure 7.4.1-3 Contour 2-D plot for hot-fill shrinkage with targeted mechanical

properties for minimised shrinkage. ..........................................................................176

Figure 7.4.2-1 Best performing burst strength result via Augmented DoE ...............178

Page 20: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

v

Figure 7.4.2-2 Worst burst strength results via Augmented DoE..............................179

Figure 7.4.2-3 Burst test results via maximised constrained values ..........................180

Figure 7.4.3-1 Top 4 performing wall thickness measurements via Augmented DoE

....................................................................................................................................181

Figure 7.4.4-1. A 2-D contour plot for top load strength versus preform cooling time

....................................................................................................................................182

Figure 7.4.4-2 Top load predicted results via Echip DoE software...........................184

Figure 7.5.1-1 Tensile panel modulus results via optimised DoE heat-set conditions

for BB7755 60 % - RPET 40 % blends .....................................................................186

Figure 7.5.2-1 Maximum yield strength for optimised BB7755 60 % RPET 40 %

heat-set conditions .....................................................................................................187

Figure 7.6.1-1 Process shrinkage via optimised heat-set DoE for BB7755 60 % -

RPET 40 % blends .....................................................................................................188

Figure 7.6.1-2 Process shrinkage data for optimised Voridian CA12 96 % – RPET 4%

blend...........................................................................................................................188

Figure 7.6.2-1 Optimised BB7755 60 % – RPET 40 % DoE results for hot-fill

shrinkage. ...................................................................................................................190

Figure 7.6.2-2 Optimised CA12 96 % – RPET 4 % DoE results for hot-fill shrinkage.

....................................................................................................................................192

Figure 7.6.3-1 Burst strength results for optimised BB7755 60 % – RPET 40 % blends

....................................................................................................................................193

Figure 7.6.3-2 Burst strength results for optimised CA 12 96 % – RPET 4% blends

....................................................................................................................................193

Figure 7.6.3-3 A 2-D contour plot for constrained optimised BB7755 – RPET material

blend for heat-set conditions......................................................................................194

Page 21: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

vi

Figure 7.7.1-1 Glass transition results as a function of heat-set temperature via

derivative ρC curve. ..................................................................................................197

Figure 7.8-1 Localised density measurements for optimised BB7755 60 % – RPET 40

% blends.....................................................................................................................201

Figure 7.8-2 Density measurements for entire panel section for Optimise BB7755 60

% – RPET 40 % blend DoE.......................................................................................202

Figure 7.9-1 Tan delta results via DMTA for optimised BB7755 60 % – RPET 40 %

blends .........................................................................................................................203

Figure 7.9-2 Comparison to glass transition temperatures via DMTA and TMDSC 204

Page 22: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

i

List of Tables Table 2.5-1 Production totals of Melt Phase Resins Manufacturers............................16

Table 2.5-2 Production totals of SSP Manufacturers...................................................17

Table 2.5-3 Manufacturers and trade name for PET materials. www.matweb.com....18

Table 3.2-1 Thermal, physical and mechanical properties of SkyPET BB7755 PET

Material Used...............................................................................................................63

Table 3.2-2 Thermal, physical and mechanical properties of SkyPET BB7755 PET

Material Used...............................................................................................................63

Table 3.7.1-1 TMDSC weight results for each material run........................................71

Table 3.8.1-1 Injection Moulding Operating Conditions.............................................73

Table 4.2-1 Process conditions for bottle production to heat-set experimental runs

manufactured via Aoki.................................................................................................82

Table 4.2-2. ISBM Process conditions for 60 % SkyPET BB7755 – 40 % RPET heat-

set process. ...................................................................................................................83

Table 4.2-3. ISBM Process conditions for 60 % Voridian CA12 – 40 % RPET heat-set

process..........................................................................................................................84

Table 4.3.2-1 Example of IR Spot Temperature Location...........................................91

Table 4.7-1 Sample Burst Test results .........................................................................97

Table 4.8-1 A sample measurement positions for wall thickness location..................99

Table 5.2-1 Initial DoE for heat-set ISBM Process ...................................................107

Table 5.3-1 Results summary table for initial DoE using Quadratic Model .............112

Table 5.4-1 How many trial summary table from Augmented Quadratic Model with

increase G Efficiency Value ......................................................................................121

Table 5.4-2 DoE augmented experimental run for improved resolution ...................122

Page 23: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

ii

Table 5.5-1 Results summary table to Optimised Echip Results using Augmented

Quadratic Model ........................................................................................................123

Table 5.7-1 Example of temperature recordings for PST experimental 15 ...............130

Table 6.5-1 Localised density and percentage crystallinity measurements. ..............146

Table 6.5-2 Entire panel section density and percentage crystallinity measurements.

....................................................................................................................................147

Table 7.2.1-1 Results summary table to molecular number and weight average,

Polydispersity index and end group concentration. ...................................................158

Table 7.3.1-1 Preform surface temperature for the best performing hot-fill shrinkage

results .........................................................................................................................166

Table 7.3.1-2 Preform surface temperature for the poorest performing hot-fill

shrinkage results.........................................................................................................166

Table 7.7.1-1 Thermal analysis results obtained from TMDSC for all PET raw

materials.....................................................................................................................195

Table 7.7.1-2 Thermal analysis summary results table for optimised heat-set 60

percent BB7755 – 40 percent RPET blend. ...............................................................196

Table 7.7.1-3 Thermal analysis data for 96 % CA12 – 4 % RPET Optimised DoE

beverage containers....................................................................................................196

Page 24: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

iii

List of Equations Equation 2.8-1..............................................................................................................38

Equation 2.8.1-1...........................................................................................................38

Equation 2.9-1..............................................................................................................41

Equation 2.9-2..............................................................................................................41

Equation 2.9.1-1...........................................................................................................43

Equation 2.9.1-2...........................................................................................................44

Equation 2.10.2-1.........................................................................................................46

Equation 2.10.2-2.........................................................................................................47

Equation 2.10.2-3.........................................................................................................48

Equation 2.10.2-4.........................................................................................................48

Equation 2.10.2-5.........................................................................................................48

Equation 2.10.2-6.........................................................................................................48

Equation 4.2-1..............................................................................................................79

Equation 4.4-1..............................................................................................................92

Equation 4.4-2..............................................................................................................92

Equation 4.4-3..............................................................................................................92

Equation 4.6.1-1...........................................................................................................94

Equation 4.6.2-1...........................................................................................................96

Equation 6-1...............................................................................................................139

Equation 6.3-1............................................................................................................143

Equation 6.4-1............................................................................................................145

Equation 6.7-1............................................................................................................149

Equation 6.7-2............................................................................................................150

Equation 7.2.1-1.........................................................................................................157

Page 25: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

iv

Equation 7.2.3-1.........................................................................................................160

Equation 7.5.1-1.........................................................................................................185

Equation 7.8-1............................................................................................................199

Page 26: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 1 Introduction

1

1. Chapter 1: Introduction

Page 27: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 1 Introduction

2

1.1. Introduction Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET) has become the preferred material over glass and

metal in packaging applications. As virgin PET consumption increases within the

packaging sector, a new feedstock material – in this case Post consumable PET – has

become available. Post Consumable PET (PC-PET) material is not biodegradable. As

such, a waste management problem within particular regions of the world has

surfaced. Local, State and Federal governments in Australia are taking a leading

interest in this waste problem. A waste management strategy via curb side collection

has been implemented to recycle PC-PET feedstock into new applications.

Manufacturing applications for Recycled Polyethylene Terephthalate (RPET) include

• Films

• Sheets

• Fibres

• Automotive components

• Beverage containers etc.

This study will evaluate RPET - virgin PET blends for hot-fill applications

incorporating heat-set technologies. The research study will manufacture heat-set

beverage containers utilising a Single Stage Injection Stretch Blow Moulding (ISBM)

process. A detailed explanation concerning heat-set methodologies is presented in

chapter 2.11. Morphological changes due to heat-set conditions are presented in the

current research study.

Page 28: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 1 Introduction

3

The ISBM process is complex. Controlled process variables are needed to maintain a

stable processing condition. The optimisation of the process parameters directly

affects the final properties of a PET beverage container. Control over these process

variables for the Design of Experiment (DoE) is of principle importance. Process

variables include blow time; preform cooling time, heat-set temperature and virgin

material and RPET blend formulation. These are discussed in the preceding chapters:

• Chapter 4.1 experimental set-up

• Chapter 4.2 implementations of heat-set capabilities.

• Chapter 5 method for use and validation for DOE.

1.2. Overview of recycling PET consumption has seen steady growth over the last 10 years. PC-PET is now

readily available. New techniques for recycling PET (RPET) have been developed.

Moreover, investigations of newer methodologies are being developed to improve

efficiencies for increased purification of the final properties of RPET. Economic

considerations for recycling PET include:-

• method of collection of PET containers

• the recycling process

• Separation of commingled feedstock causing contamination of the feedstock

• end product use. (Oromiehie et al. 2004).

Page 29: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 1 Introduction

4

The consumer is critical to the recycling process. Education has been given via local

council in the form of booklets and flow charts. Used containers are placed into

specified recycling bins with other plastic items. The commingled polymer is

accumulated via curb side collection, sorted, baled and sent to PET recyclers. The

composed material is crushed by way of a debaler. In the proceeding stage, the

crushed material is transferred into a trammel and sorted by size. The main feedstock

consists of PET and Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) bottles. Care must be taken to separate

these two incompatible materials from the waste stream. The bottles are passed via

x-ray scanners, designed to identify PVC bottles from the waste stream (Dvorak et al.

2000).

Wet grinders are used to granulate the beverage containers. This material is washed in

sodium hydroxide, dried and sorted for colour. The material is dried, then ground via

4mm screens. The dried material is later transferred to the solid state polymerisation

process where the material is subjected to vacuum and temperature for 12 hours. This

process increases the materials molecular weight (Mw) and intrinsic viscosity (IV).

The material is later transferred to desiccant dryers where the PET flake is extruded

for further melt filtration and later stored into silos. A flow diagram from consumer

education to RPET material feedstock availability is presented in figure 1.2-1

Page 30: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 1 Introduction

5

g

Consumer Education

DisposalCurb side collection

Transport feedstock to

recycling plant

Debale / crush PC-PET Feedstck

Bottles scanned for removal of

PVC materials

Sorted PC-PET bottles are granulated

Granulated material is washed in

NaOH

Washed PET coarse flake is

sorted by colour

PET Flake is fine ground via

4mm screen

PET material is transfered for

SSP

Volitiles are removed during

the SSP process,

increasing the Mw

Material is conveyed to

desicant dryers for extrusion

Flake is extuded,

screened via melt filtration

Palletised material is

stored in silos

Figure 1.2-1 Flow diagram to the recycling of PC-PET to palletised RPET

1.3. Heat-set technologies PET materials for bottle applications do not exhibit good dimensional stability at

elevated temperatures. PET materials demonstrate low glass transition (Tg)

temperatures between 78 – 82 oC (Rosato 1989). To improve a PET container’s

thermal stability during the hot-fill process, a heat-set technique is applied.

The ISBM industry utilises many variations of the heat-set technique which include a

single or two stage ISBM process (Boyd et al. 2002b; Ozawa et al. 2003; Takada et

al. 2002). This research study will focus on single stage ISBM process applying a

heat-set method utilising a panel-less, ribless 375 ml PET container.

The heat-set process requires a heated mould, – cold mould of 80 oC and hot holds of

150 oC – generally incorporating heated oil or water as the heating medium. The use

of water or oil as the heating medium is dependant upon the required heat-set

Page 31: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 1 Introduction

6

temperature. Furthermore the use of water as a heating medium is limited in achieving

mould temperatures above 73 oC. The current research study re-engineered an existing

carbonated soft drink (CSD) blow mould tool. An on–off temperature control console

was used to manage heat-set temperature via electrical heater cartridges. This

technology was chosen as the most cost effective control device due to the lack of

funds to invest in oil heating. Details concerning the blow mould heat-set

modification are discussed in chapter 4.2 and proceeding to section 4.3.1.

1.4. Project aim There is no available information concerning the influence of Virgin - RPET blends

for hot-fill applications incorporating heat-set process. Additionally, no published

works were found for the inclusion of RPET blends for beverage container application

and the influence of hot-fill performance at elevated temperatures.

The research aims to characterise RPET and heat-set intended for heat set markets.

These materials include virgin homopolymer and copolymer PET materials. This

research will assess the performance of RPET blends with high performance

homopolymer and copolymer PET at elevated temperatures for thermal stability and

material integrity. The research will describe quantitatively the optimum processing

parameters for a single stage Injection Stretch Blow Moulding (ISBM) machine using

virgin - RPET blends.

The research aims to investigate RPET, RPET blends, virgin copolymer and

homopolymer PET to improve thermal stability of PET containers at elevated

Page 32: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 1 Introduction

7

temperatures. The research will compare all materials with respect to their application

in injection stretch blow moulding for the manufacture of containers having enhanced

thermal stability and material integrity suitable for hot-fill processes.

1.5. Research Questions A comprehensive understanding via the influence on thermal stability with virgin -

RPET blends for hot-fill applications was required. Research questions were

developed to increase our knowledge. This included a thorough knowledge

concerning heat-set methodologies and preform surface temperature influence on

thermal stability at elevated temperatures. Questions constructed included:-

1. What are the critical factors that control thermal stability and material integrity

of the PET Homopolymer, PET Copolymer and RPET Copolymer containers?

2. What is the optimum processing condition for a single stage Injection Stretch

Blow Moulding Machine for the manufacturing of containers using PET

Homopolymer, PET Copolymer and RPET blends?

3. How does the RPET Copolymer container’s performance in terms of thermal

stability and material integrity compare to those made out of PET

Homopolymer and PET Copolymer?

4. How does RPET blend material characterisation in terms of percentage

crystallinity, glass transition temperature, and morphology relate to the

container performance in terms of thermal stability and material integrity?

5. What is the influence of RPET and PET Homopolymer and Copolymer Blend

composition on the thermal stability and material integrity of the containers?

Page 33: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 1 Introduction

8

1.6. Contribution to new knowledge The research will focus on the use of RPET for improving mechanical properties and

thermal stability. The proposed research will be based on existing expertise in the area

of material characterisation and polymer processing. Characterisation and processing

of both virgin PET and RPET and their applications in ISBM have been the topic of

ongoing research as final year projects and postgraduate research in the ‘Materials and

Manufacturing Discipline’.

Page 34: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

9

2. Chapter 2: Literature Review

Page 35: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

10

2.1. Introduction The last thirty years has seen dramatic changes in traditional packaging materials used

for beverage containers. PET has challenged glass, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) beverage

applications as well as metal. PET is considered as the preferred packaging material over

these materials. Although weight, safety concerns such as its drop impact properties over

glass and cost reduction have influenced this trend, PET has demonstrated excellent

properties (tensile and impact strength) whilst maintaining glass like optical clarity. PET

yields excellent gas barrier properties (Jones 2002). Other new developments include

bio-based PET materials used for the production of beverage containers (Charbonneau et

al. 2000)

As PET has replaced traditional packaging materials, an improved recycling collection

system has also been established within Australia. This has seen an increase in the

amount of Recycled PET (RPET) material made available for the manufacturing of

beverage containers (Baxter et al. 2003). Although PET has embraced improved

recycling techniques, glass is still preferred due to its ease of cleaning and refilling

capabilities when compared with RPET (Rule 2000). Limitations exist for liquid fluids

requiring increased dimensional stability at hot-fill temperatures above 85 – 90 oC. Due

to this limitation, glass is preferred as the material of choice. However, new bio-based

PET materials are available to compete with glass due to an increase in this materials Tg

temperature (Charbonneau et al. 2000). Furthermore, the inclusion of RPET has

demonstrated potentially improved thermal stability at elevated temperatures,

minimising the dimensional shrinkage undertaken during the hot-fill process (Fann et al.

1996).

Page 36: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

11

The hot-fill process is an established method for filling high acid foods with pH levels

<4.6 providing sufficient shelf life at stable ambient environments (Tekkanat. 2000).

The food contents are enclosed in heat exchangers as temperatures are elevated between

90 – 95 oC for 30 seconds. This technique allows the sterilisation of liquid food whilst

minimising the growth of micro-organisms during product storage. The contents are

then cooled and dispensed into beverage containers between temperature ranges of 85 –

95 oC. Upon dispensing, the beverage container is capped immediately. The container is

required to stand on its base between 1 - 3 minutes. Upon completion of this time, the

container is placed on its side for 1 – 2 minutes and dispensed into cooling baths

thereafter (Maruhashi 2001; Tekkanat 2000).

The hot-fill process acts as a sterilisation mechanism for the inner walls of the container.

Other hot-fill methodologies include pasteurisation and retort process (Boyd 2004).

These additional hot-fill techniques are utilised in killing pathogens and harmful micro-

organisms, suppressing potential bacterial overgrowth in the food product during storage

(Mc Chesney et al. 1983; Ophir et al. 2004; Tekkanat. 2000). However, PET has poor

thermal stability properties at elevated temperatures.

To allow for the hot filling of liquids foods and drink products, a heat-set process is used

to increase dimensional stability to a PET beverage container for the hot-fill process as

well as beverage container preparation for hot-filling. This heat-set process minimises

the overall shrinkage and distortion exposure of a beverage container during the hot-fill

process. It enables temperature increase of the food contents during the hot-fill process,

to assist in the prevention of food spoilage. The heat-set process is applied during

Page 37: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

12

Injection Stretch Blow Moulding (ISBM) bottle production. This method of production

enhances the thermal and mechanical properties to a given container.

Studies have shown an increase in the materials glass transition temperature (Tg) as a

function of the heat-set process (Mc Chesney et al. 1983; Ophir et al. 2004). A decrease

in hot-fill volume shrinkage (S2) – that is improved thermal stability –, improved

Youngs modulus (E), and an increase in the percentage crystallinity as a function of

heat-set time have all been observed in previous studies. (Fann et al. 1996; Jabarin 1995;

Mc Chesney et al. 1983).

Additional research has demonstrated heat-set temperatures of 130 oC, 145 oC and 160

oC for homopolymer PET to increase the materials heat of fusion ( HΔ ). Moreover, top

load strengths were reported to increase due to the heat-set process (Mc Chesney et al.

1983; Ophir et al. 2004). Moreover, an increase in the refractive index with increase

mould temperatures during the heat-set process is observed (Sototo et al. 2000).

However, the glass transition Tg temperature has been shown not to be the determining

factor for improved thermal stability (Boyd 2004; Gohil 1993a; Gohil 1993b; Gohil

1994; Maruhashi 2001; Maruhashi Y et al. 1992; Natu et al. 2005).

Chapter 2 provides a comprehensive description of poly(ethylene terephthalate) (PET)

made for beverage container application. Polyester synthesis and manufacturing

techniques will be reviewed in this chapter. This will include RPET synthesis via

commercial Post Consumable PET (PC-PET) techniques used to recycle PC-PET into

RPET. There is little literature concerning the mechanical, thermal, morphological and

rheological properties with increased levels of RPET – PET blends for hot-fill

Page 38: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

13

applications. This discussion will include the removal of contaminant from PC-PET

waste stream. Methods include glycolysis, methanolysis and hydrolysis and are

discussed in chapter 2.6 and preceeding sections.

The current body of knowledge for rheological and thermal experimental techniques is

presented in chapter 2, section 2.8 and 2.9. This section will include dilute solution

viscometry, melt flow index and rheological characterisation using parallel plate

viscomters. Thermal analysis techniques, of Differential Scanning Calorimeter (DSC)

and Temperature Modulated Differential Scanning Calorimeter (TMDSC) are presented.

This research study will present the current limitations for RPET and virgin PET blends.

It will describe the single Injection Stretch Blow Moulding (ISBM) process and

application. A review of heat-set methodologies is presented in section 2.11. Such

techniques are used for possible filling of high acid foods with pH levels less than 4.6

(Tekkanat. 2000). These techniques allow stress relaxation within the amorphous region

prior to hot-filling. Section 2.15 discusses the current heat-set technology and methods

for improving the degree of crystallinity, mechanical and thermal properties.

2.2. Market Sector Ten percent of the global community consumes 54 percent of the worlds soft drink

market (Elliot B, 2003). PET fibre production totals 70 percent of global consumption

with bottle grade resin totalling 22 percent (SRI Consulting). In 2000, the total global

consumption of PET performs totalled 6.96 million tons.

Page 39: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

14

In 2001, the fastest growth sector in PET beverage containers was observed in still water

and carbonated soft drink (CSD) markets with North America followed by Latin

American leading this trend. During 2000 – 2001, the usage of PET within this

packaging sector rose 14 percent when compared with 1995 data (Biron 2004). Sales for

2002 in (CSD) for US markets sold 10.1 billion 5.78 litre (lt.) cases with Coke Cola and

Pepsi retaining 7.64 Billion (5.78 lt. cases) market share (Sicher J 2003). This data

suggest a healthy supply of PC-PET feedstock available for the manufacture of PET

ISBM beverage containers.

The 560 ml beverage container is the preferred packaging product within this market

sector. However, in the United States of America, the recycling rates for PET have been

declining since 1995 (NAPCOR 2002). The European market in 2004 collected 665,000

tonnes PET bottles. It is projected by year 2014, an increase to 1,612,000 tonnes of PET

bottles available for recycling (Bertelli 2005). This data suggest a healthy supply of PC-

PET feedstock available for the manufacture of PET ISBM beverage containers.

2.3. Bottle Design Developments The rigid packaging sector includes heat-set bottles incorporating vacuum panels; this to

provide integral strength and assist with dimensional stability of the packaging material

during the hot-fill process (Akiho 1989; Collette et al. 1989; Gaydosh. K et al. 2000).

The vacuum panel designs are engineered to control molecular relaxation whilst in

contact with the heated fluid. The current designs panels are aesthetically flawed and do

not provide a smooth surface for labelling purposes. The consumer does not like the feel

of vacuum panels and limitation to the labelling process discourages point of sale. The

Page 40: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

15

current heat-set bottles have increased ratio of mass per unit volume, meaning they

contain additional weight to improve dimensional stability (Caldicott 1999).

Until recently the market has seen developments in PET beverage container not

including side or vacuum panels (Lisch. et al. 2005). This has included a redesign in the

base of the beverage container. The new base design incorporates pinch grips and

vacuum panels. Under vacuum the pinch grips and vacuum panels deform inwardly,

minimising the final shrinkage of the container during hot-fill process. Extensive

preform and bottle redesign is incorporated, enhancing the final properties of the PET

container (Lisch. et al. 2005). This coupled with optimised ISBM have allowed such

improvements.

2.4. Material Developments Post consumer PET (PC-PET) in Australia has seen a steady increase since its

introduction into the Australia market. In 2004 PET consumption totalled 131,708 tons.

Of this total, 17,190 tons was reprocessed into RPET for domestic markets. Another 18,

862 tons was further recycled into RPET for Asian export markets. A total of 27.4

percent return into RPET material is observed (O’Farrell et al. 2005). The above

mentioned figures indicate an increase in domestic market usage from 2003 results. PC-

PET has an established recycling system in Australia, which at present represents the

highest material recycled in Australia. The national average of recycling for all materials

in 2004 calendar year is 12.6 percent. PET has demonstrated a recycling yield of 27.4

percent. Although this figure is less than 2003, it clearly demonstrates the success and

availability in feed stock from PC-PET for beverage containers.

Page 41: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

16

2.5. Material Distribution by Type PET is manufactured via the Melt Phase and Solid State Polymerisation (SSP) process.

In 1999, the total production of PET via melt phase totalled 29,636 kilometric ton per

year (kmt/yr). SSP of PET for the same production period totalled 8,374 kmt/yr. SSP

yields 50 percent resins for the CSD markets with 13 percent for mineral water bottles.

PET resin for hot-fill application yields 8 percentage of total SSP production. Figure

2.5-1 demonstrates the break-up of material by segment usage

50%

%

8%

CSDWaterHot Fill

Figure 2.5-1 Material Distribution from SSP

Table 2.5-1 and 2.5-2 provide manufacture’s production totals for each segmented

polymerisation process for 1999.

Table 2.5-1 Production totals of Melt Phase Resins Manufacturers

Company Total Melt Phase Resin Global Consumption

(kilometric/year)

Eastman Chemicals 1508

DuPont 1490

Formosa Plastics Group 1480

Toray Industries 911

IMASAB S.A. 877

Koch Industries 877

Page 42: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

17

Hualon 836

Wellman 779

Reliance Industries 690

Yizheng Chemical Fibre 670

Far Eastern Textiles 658

Kohap 655

Tuntex Group 650

Shell 621

Texmaco Jaya 592

Others 16,343

Table 2.5-2 Production totals of SSP Manufacturers

Company Total SSP Resin Global Consumption

(kilometric/year)

Eastman Chemicals 1,582

Shell 675

DuPont 440

Wellman Inc 433

IMASAB S.A 418

Koch Industries 418

Formosa Plastics Group 252

Dow Chemicals 211

Kohap 210

Rhone – Poulene 198

Hoechst (Kosa) 191

Far East Textile 180

Radici Group 130

Tong Kook Trading 130

Others 2,697

PET is manufactured by a variety of processes from around the world. Table 2.5-3

below provides manufactures and trade names for PET bottles grade materials.

Page 43: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

18

Table 2.5-3 Manufacturers and trade name for PET materials. www.matweb.com

Manufacturer Trade Name

ALBIS PLASTICS Petlon

Dow Chemicals Lighter

Melinar

Rynite

DuPont Polyester Resins & Intermediates

Sorona

Eastar

Heatwave

Eastapak

Eastman Chemical Co

Thermx

KoSa KoSa 2201

MRC Polymers Maxnite

PolyOne (formerly M.A. Hanna) Edgetek

Shell Chemicals Cleartuf 8006

Shinkong Synthetic Fibres ShinPET

Sk Chemicals SkyPet

Ticona Impet

Toonkook Corp TexPet

2.6. PET Synthesis Virgin PET is a semi-crystalline material with a linear stereo-specific molecular

structure. Polymerised via the condensation reaction, PET - a hydroscopic material -

requires sufficient drying before processing (McFarlane 1990; Voridian Pty Ltd 2002).

PET can be polymerised as a semi-crystalline or amorphous (APET) material.

Synthesise of PET produce both homopolymer and copolymer material. The

morphology of PET consists of both amorphous and crystalline regions within a

beverage container. Within the amorphous region, the molecular arrangements are

Page 44: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

19

completely random. This entangled arrangement results in small spherulitic cell

structures providing glass like optical clarity.

Furthermore, the total amounts of residual monomer found in PET materials effects the

materials crystallisation rates. Studies have demonstrated via Small Angel X-ray

Scattering (SAXS) show that spherulitic growth rates are directly proportional to the

molecular weight of the material (Fann et al. 1996).

The type and amount of catalyst used for the manufacture of PET materials also affects

the rate of crystallisation. It has been demonstrated less than 5 percent of cyclohexane

dimethanol (CHDM) impairs the crystallisation rate for PET materials. Diethylene

glycol (DEG) and isophthalic acid (IPA) have also demonstrated similar results (Brooks

2000). Crystallisation can commence once the preform is heated above the Tg of the

material and the preform blown into the blow mould tool. This delay in crystallisation

allows for the manufacture of beverage containers. This ensures controlled spherulitic

structures providing glass like clarity when compared to homopolymer grade PET

containers (Scheirs et al. 2003).

Intrinsic viscosity (IV) of PET varies, determined by its end use application. Textile

fibres, the most commonly used material has an IV range of 0.57 – 0.65 decilitres per

gram (dL/g); bottle grade PET 0.72 – 0.85 dL/g; tray PET 0.85 – 0.95 dL/g and tire cord

PET an IV between 0.95 – 1.05 dL/g. Production of PET bottle grade material yields

molecular weights ( wM ) >24,000 (Duh 2001).

Page 45: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

20

IV properties are affected by the thermal history exposed to PET materials. It is found

that continued processing of PET will see a decrease in IV properties (Fann et al. 1996).

This will also see a reduction in molecular weight (Mw).

Synthesis of PET begins by manufacturing a pre-polymer using the melt phase

polymerisation process. Dibasic acid, in this case terephthalic acid (TPA) or dimethyl

terephthalic acid (DMT) is reacted with ethylene glycol (EG). Manufacturers of PET

materials currently use pure terephthalic acid (PTA) and ethylene glycol (Jones 2002).

Copolymers of poly(ethylene terephthalate) contain 1,4 – cyclohexylene dimethylene

terephthalate (PCT) and 1,4 – cyclohexane dimethanol (CHDM) for the production of

carbonated drink bottles (CSD) (Brooks 2000).

Polymerisation of PET requires an esterification reaction between a carboxyl end group

and a hydroxyl end group with H2O as the by-product. Transesterfication involves the

reaction between carboxyl and hydroxyl end group with EG as by-product (Duh 2002).

The preferred reaction used is the trans-esterification process (Olabisi 1997). Solid State

polymerisation process is used to yield high molecular weight (Mw) PET (Jones 2002;

Kim et al. 2003). Figures 2.6-1 and 2.6-2 demonstrate the transesterification and

esterification reactions for PET synthesis.

C

O

C

O

O CH2R CH2 O R

Page 46: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

21

+

OC

O

CH2 OHCH2

O

COCH2 CH2OH

Transesterification

OC

O

CH2CH2

O

CO

OHCH2 CH2OH+

Figure 2.6-1 Polymerisation Process via Transesterification reaction for PET Synthesis

+OC

OO

CO CH2 OHCH2

Esterification

O

COH

C

O

O CH2 CH2

O

CO OH2+

Figure 2.6-2 Polymerisation Process via esterification reaction for PET Synthesis

The first stage requires the transesterification of TPA and EG (Milgrom 1992). A

mixture of EG and TPA with a mole ratio of 1.2 – 1 is added to the reaction process

(Jones 2002). During the initial stages, an ester interchange occurs between the ester and

Page 47: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

22

alcohol until the IV has achieved 0.15 – 0.45 dL/g (Charbonneau et al. 2000). The ester

interchange is a result of heating and stirring the monomers with reactants under dry

nitrogen environment between 100 – 200 kPa (Charbonneau et al. 2000).

Temperatures are raised to 260 - 280 oC within the first reaction vessel. Pressure is

increased and maintained to 300 kPa (Charbonneau et al. 2000). The reaction is

continued; termination occurs once the degree of esterification reaches 98 percent. The

pressure within the reactor is decreased to 100 kPa. EG is recovered during the

esterification process and returned to the reaction vessel. The esterification process

forms bis(2-hydroxythyl) terephthalate (BHET) between 220 - 265 oC under autogenous

pressure (Schiavone 2002a). The direct esterification reaction is usually carried out

without the use of a catalyst.

The pre-polymer is then transferred into another condensation reactor, where the process

is assisted using metal alkoxide compounds. These include titanium (Ti), tin (Sn), and

antimony (Sb). A crystallite size of less than 9 nanometer (nm) with a target IV of 0.30

dL/g to 0.36 dL/g is desired. A target density at room temperature of 1.413 g/cc is

achieved (Schiavone 2002a). Time of reaction occurs between 1 to 4 hours. It is

understood that the lower the reaction temperature, the longer the reaction needed to

complete the process (Jones 2002)

Stabilisers, including phosphorous (P) are used to react with catalysts before the

polycondensation process. This enables the control of high carboxyl end groups (Jones

2002). Carboxiimide or Epoxide can also be used to control the potential of carboxyl

end group degradation (Duh 1980). During the initial melt phase polymerisation

Page 48: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

23

process, by-products including Acetaldehyde (AA) less than 50 ppm) can occur

(Charbonneau et al. 2000). This impurity can limit the end use application of PET (Duh

2001; Rosato 1989).Other by-products include water (H2O), EG, and methanol.

The second stage includes the polycondensation reaction. Catalysts such as antimony

oxide (Sb2O3) at addition levels of 100-600 parts per million (ppm) are used

(Charbonneau et al. 2000). Germanium (Ge) catalysts are also used with addition rates

between 90 to 150 ppm (Jones 2002). Titanium (Ti) at 10 ppm is used within the

initiation phase in high levels to promote reactive sites for polymer growth (Jones 2002).

. Magnesium (Mg), Cobalt (Co) and Zinc (Zn) are commonly used catalysts for PET

production. Temperatures are increase to 285 oC (Charbonneau et al. 2000; Jones 2002;

Schiavone 2002a). Residence time for the reaction is kept to 65 to 70 minutes, where

the reaction vessel is brought to atmospheric pressure (Charbonneau et al. 2000; Jones

2002; Schiavone 2002a).

Solid State polymerisation (SSP) is then used to increase the molecular weight (Mw) of

PET. Within a rotary vacuum tumble dryer with less than 0.1 kPa is applied; the pre-

polymer is subjected to a residence time of 54 hours. Vacuum is applied to the process

to remove residual EG and H2O vapour. This increases the materials molecular weight

(Mw) (Charbonneau et al. 2000; Schiavone 2002b). An IV of 0.81 dL/g and density at

room temperature of 1.4151 g/cc is observed. An apparent crystal size of 8.2 nm is

found by X-ray diffraction (Schiavone 2002b).

Page 49: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

24

2.6.1. Synthesis of PEIT The development of Polyethylene Isosorbide Terephthalate (PEIT) for beverage

containers has gained momentum. The monomer, isosorbide is derived from corn plants.

The starch is modified to liquid sorbitol via hydrolysis and hydrogenation. The liquid

sorbitol undergoes dehydration and purification for the manufacture of isosorbide. This

particular monomer is white in nature, having a melting point between 62 – 63 oC

(Dupont 2003).

PEIT polymerisation includes a two-stage reaction, where ethylene glycol (EG) and

1,4:3,6 dianhydro-D-sorbitol (DAS) or commonly known as Isosorbide are mixed

together with a diester, in this case dimethyl terephthalate (DMT) (Charbonneau et al.

2000).

H

O

O

OH

H

OH

Figure 2.6.1-1 An example of Isosorbide structure (Khanarian et al. 2000c)

This reaction results in the transesterification between EG and a methyl group (Jones

2002). The ester interchange occurs at 150 oC within an inert atmosphere of dry nitrogen

(N2) gas. Methanol is formed and distilled from the reaction process (Charbonneau et al.

2000; Jones 2002). The reaction continues until the methanol evolution stops as

temperatures are raised to 250 oC (Jones 2002; Khanarian et al. 2000b). Catalysts used

during initiation stage include Magnesium Acetate (Mg2+), Cobalt Acetate (Co2+) and

Zinc Acetate (Zn2+) (Jones 2002; Khanarian et al. 2000b).

Page 50: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

25

The second stage requires a condensation catalyst – Sb2O3 – to be added approximately

100 to 400 ppm. Tetrahydronaphthalene (THN) is used to aid in the heat transfer of the

reaction and is added during the ester interchange to retain volatile components

(Khanarian et al. 2000c). The amount required is between 0.25 to 1 wt percent of the

reaction mixture (Charbonneau et al. 2000). Temperatures are further raised between

250 - 285 oC allowing for the formation of bis(β-hydroxyethyl)terephthalate (BHET).

During this time, EG is removed and collected due to transesterification reaction

(Charbonneau et al. 2000).

The monomers and catalyst are heated within a temperature range of 275 – 285 oC using

vacuum of 0.1 kPa. Residual EG monomer and H2O vapour is removed from the

reaction process in order to increase the Mw (Charbonneau et al. 2000; Dupont 2003).

Within this temperature range, propagation of the polymer begins. The resultant material

after the melt phase polymerisation process yields an amorphous material.

This two-stage process can yield IV of 0.65 dL/g without the use of Solid State

Polymerisation. DuPont’s PEIT polymerisation methods are made possible from mixing

Pure Terephthalic acid, EG and DAS. Researchers have polymerised diacetoxystyrene

(DAS) monomer with EG and terephthaloyl dichloride in toluene solution with the

reactant by-product being hydrochloric acid (HCI). The reactant is described in figure

2.6.1-2 (Storebeck et al. 1996).

Page 51: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

26

OO

C

OH

C

OH

+ OHCH2

CH2

OH

H

O

O

OH

H

OH

+

PTA EGDAS

Figure 2.6.1-2 Stereochemistry reaction used by DuPont for the manufacture of PEIT (Storebeck et al. 1996)

The third stage is to increase the IV of the polymer suitable for bottle manufacture. The

use of solid-state polymerisation is used above 0.70 dL/g. Composition of EG,

Isosorbide and TPA with a 0.25 to 10-mole percent may increase their molecular weight

(Mw) by solid-state polymerisation. Crystallinity of the PET granule can be achieved by

heating to temperatures between 115 – 140 oC with a residence time between 2 to 12

hours (Charbonneau et al. 2000; Khanarian et al. 1998).

DuPont patent for Isosorbide PET production demonstrate good results with less

isosorbide monomer between 0.25 - 3 mole percentage due to improved crystallinity

kinetics (Charbonneau et al. 2000; Khanarian et al. 2000a). During solid-state

polymerisation, the amorphous polymer is placed within a stream of nitrogen gas

between 195 – 198 oC for 10 hours. The results are IV 0.8 dL/g and greater

(Charbonneau et al. 2000; Khanarian et al. 2000c).

PEIT has been manufactured with the glass Tg well above 100 oC, whilst maintaining

physical and mechanical properties. (Charbonneau LF 2000; Khanarian G 2000). This

material has potential benefits for hot-fill applications

Page 52: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

27

2.6.2. Heat-set Materials High Performance PET polymers – materials developed for heat set applications – have

been designed to meet elevated hot-fill temperature. One such improvement has been

due to the development of infrared absorbers used in material compounds. Carbon black

(CB) is used in small addition rates (ppm) without effecting optical clarity. Temperature

uniformity of the preform prior to inflation in the blow moulding process is observed

using CB, ensuring even wall thickness distribution during stretching in the biaxial

direction. CB has demonstrated to be responsible for an increase in Tg properties.

Current evidence shows CB to be an effective nucleating agent, promoting smaller

spherulitic size structures within the morphology of the polymer (Kegel et al. 2002) .

As mentioned in section 2.6.1 an increase in glass transition temperature (Tg ) was

observed in Polyethylene Isosorbide Terephthalate (PEIT) – a high performance

polymer – polymerised by using terephthaloyl moieties, ethylene glycol moieties and

1,4:3,6 dianhydro – D – sorbitol referred as isosorbide moieties. Existing studies

demonstrate that increasing isosorbide monomer content in PEIT yields an increase in Tg

values to over 100 oC. The Tg temperature for Isosorbide materials is well above current

Tg values for bottle grade PET materials. Polyesters such as PEIT have yielded Tg

temperatures of 200 oC.

Thermal stability of PEIT were analysed by exposing samples to 280 oC for 15 min, and

then cooled to ambient temperature. The results were analysed by Proton Nuclear

Magnetic Resonance (H-NMR and C-NMR) spectroscopy and showed no evidence of

degradation. Research conducted by HNA Holdings, Inc found the inclusion of an

Page 53: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

28

isosorbide monomer provides less molecular chain mobility at elevated temperatures

preventing material degradation (Charbonneau et al. 2000; Storebeck et al. 1996).

Cyclohexane dimethanol (CHDM) is used in favour of Isophthalic Acid (IPA) to

manufacture copolymer PET. An increase in Tg is observed. Investigatory work has

found CHDM is used as a crystallisation inhabitant. The results found an increase of 9

oC in Tg, improving the optical clarity and the processing window for the ISBM process

(Brooks 2000).

A direct correlation exists between the rate of Carbon Dioxide (CO2) permeability and

wall thickness for a PET container as well as Mw (Mc Chesney et al. 1983). Oxygen

(O2) permeabilities affect the shelf life for liquid foods products in PET containers (Mc

Chesney et al. 1983; Natu et al. 2005). This CO2 loss is directly proportional to the total

wall thickness to a PET container and the total volume capacity of the container (Mc

Chesney et al. 1983; Scheirs 1998).

Intrinsic viscosity (IV) values are an important parameter for the ISBM process. This

important property is necessary for the manufacture of PET beverage containers via the

ISBM. PET materials utilised for Injection Stretch Blow Moulding (ISBM)

manufacturing require IV values greater than 0.70 dL/g. PET materials have poor melt

strength. Increases in IV demonstrate increases in Mw. This increases the melt strength

of PET materials, allowing for the production of beverage containers within the (ISBM)

process (Awaja et al. 2004)

Page 54: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

29

2.6.3. Synthesis of PC-PET PET does not create a direct hazard to the eco system. PC-PET is seen as a noxious

material due to its high resistance to atmospheric and biological agents (Scheirs 1998).

Recycling of PET bottles requires the combination of sorting and separation techniques.

Sensory devices (X-ray) are used to remove PVC bottles and HDPE bottles from the

PET waste stream. Recyclers of PET now receive sorted PET bails.

Manual sorting system does not supply 100 percentage contamination free PET bottles:

the presence of PVC bottles remain. Further separation is required to minimise the

possible contaminates. RPET contaminated with 1 ppm of PVC or more can discolour

PET. PVC of 2000 ppm in PET can severely reduce the viscosity of PET when

compared to virgin PET. This in turn results in a reduction of Mw and IV, hence

decreasing the melt strength of the polymer (Scheirs 1998).

A novel technique known as Froth Flotation may provide an economic and improved

method of separation of PC-PET household plastics (Teichmann D et al. 2002). This

method utilises material density properties within a fluid (water and salt solution)

rotating at high speed within a centrifugal bowl. As materials have varying densities

within a suspended fluid, separation of recyclates form due to a changed density within

the fluid medium.

One known sorting recycled system for PET separation utilises an automated device

called the MSS Bottlesort® system (Dvorak et al. 2000). This x-ray sensory device

identifies the chlorine atom present in PVC bottles. This allows for ease of detection, as

PVC bottles are 59 percentage chlorine by weight (Dvorak et al. 2000). Due to

Page 55: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

30

contamination, the recycling process of PC-PET looses 15 – 20 percentage due to the

presence of labels, caps, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) bottles, Ethylene Vinyl Acetate

(EVA) wading found inside the Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE) caps, glues, and

other incompatible materials. This incompatibility of materials further adds to the

complexities of recycling PET for food grade applications (Scheirs 1998).

A two-litre PET bottle can weigh 60 grams, a cap weighs 1 gram (g), a label and glue

weights 5g (Milgrom 1992; Scheirs 1998). These contaminants allow for the formation

of acidic compounds, catalysing via hydrolysis the PET ester linkage. Contaminations of

flake PVC bottles at elevated temperatures (below 205 oC) release Hydrochloric Acid

(HCI) (Milgrom 1992). One method in preventing PVC degradation requires blending

PET with acrylic copolymers. This allows epoxy groups to bond on the PET side chains.

This method neutralises the hydrochloric acid (HCl) group via the epoxy group

preventing degradation, reacting with the PET carboxylic group (Milgrom 1992).

2.6.4. Melt Recovery of PET A variety of Technologies can be applied to the recovery of PET. One method is via

melt polymerisation, a second is purification and depolymerisation, and a third to

convert into energy (Mathews 2002; Nichols et al. 1999; Scheirs 1998). One

disadvantage in the melt polymerisation technique is an increase in the Acetaldehyde

(AA) content to 50 parts per million (ppm) (Bashir et al. 2000).

The process begins by washing PET bottles to remove surface contamination at a micro

level. This two stage process allows the removal of dirt, stones, paper, glue, labels, and

Page 56: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

31

waded seals within a basic sodium hydroxide (NaOH) solution and detergents within a

temperature range of 20 – 75 oC (Nichols et al 1999). The Wellman process includes

washing flake PET, drying under temperatures between 130 - 200 oC whilst preventing

hydrolytic degradation. Higher temperatures can be used by performing the process in

an inert Nitrogen (N2) atmosphere. Dried PET is extruded into a two stage vented

extruder to remove impurities from the melt stream. A reduction of IV is found between

0.6 – 0.7 dL/g. The melt is blended 75 percentage virgin PET with IV approximately

0.58 – 0.64 dL/g and 25 percentage RPET via static mixers. The molten material is

extruded and pelletised. The material is then solid stated to further remove volatiles and

other impurities, whilst increasing the Mw and IV of the material (Nichols et al. 1999;

Scheirs 1998).

Another disadvantage of melt processing is the reduction of IV via thermal and

hydrolytic degradation. It is well know that PET requires drying before processing due

to its polycondensate nature, - its ability to absorb and release moisture - . Final moisture

content is 0.005 percent or less is required. An IV of 1.05 dL/g after one extrusion pass

will demonstrate a loss of 0.07 dL/g units. A starting IV of 0.5 dL/g will demonstrate a

loss of 0.03 dL/g units (Kegel et al. 2002).

Cyclic and linear oligomers can result during melt processing, effecting the printability

and dyeability of PET. Discolouration of PET as well as black spec (contamination) can

also result in small quantities (ppb). Studies have shown small amounts of CB can yield

increases in Tg, Temperature melting point (Tm), improved modulus properties (E),

tensile, and impact strength (Kegel et al. 2002).

Page 57: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

32

Raw material suppliers are utilising CB to improve the reheat process for preforms

required to manufacture CSD bottles (Eastman Chemicals ). To insure correct stretch

ratio during the ISBM process, a uniform temperature profile is desirable within the

preform. This allows the manufacturer of CSD bottles to achieve greater temperature

uniformity within the preform (Jones 2002; Scheirs 1998).

Purification of PC-PET includes a variety of technologies to meet stringent FDA

approval standards. One such method is solid state polymerisation (SSP). Flake material,

once inspected and separated from the waste stream is placed into a SSP reactor. The

flake is subjected to 0.6 – 0.7 mbar vacuum for 10 hours. Temperatures are elevated to

200 -206 oC with a residence time of 4 hours. Temperatures are reduced to 198 oC for 6

hours. The final hours include cooling time. The resultant PET flake achieves an IV of

0.83 - 0.86 dL/g. At the conclusion of this process, the PET flake with increased IV is

then extruded where the IV is reduced to 0.76 dL/g.

RPET needs to demonstrate excellent colour stability. Recycling PC-PET produces a

yellow granule. This is due to the intermolecular crosslinking and oxidations reactions.

Another disadvantage is the small presence (ppb) of carbon black (CB) within the RPET

granule. This can lead to contamination issues; particularly within the fibre industry as

line breakage could occur resulting in costly downtimes.

2.6.5. Glycolysis Recovery of PC-PET is undertaken via glycolysis. The depolymerisation of PET flake is

performed under pressure in an inert atmosphere (N2), to prevent degradation. The PET

Page 58: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

33

flake is subjected to excess glycol within a temperature range between 180 – 220 oC

resulting in bis-hydroxyethyl terephtalate (BHET) and oligomers. An ester interchange

catalyst can be used to speed up the reaction process (Jones 2002; Scheirs 1998)

O

O

C CH2 CH2OC

C

O CH2 CH2OHOH+

CH2 CH2OH O

O

CC

O

O CH2 CH2OH + Oligomers

Excess Gylcol

BHET

Figure 2.6.5-1 Depolymerisation of PC-PET via Glycolysis reaction (Scheirs 1998)

Other depolymerisation techniques have been certified to recycle post consumable

Poylethylene Terephthalate (PC-RET). Methanolysis, used to produce DMT and EG

have yielded food grade RPET. This requires a two-step process. Within methanol, and

under a pressure environment, temperatures are elevated to 200 oC where a

transesterification reaction occurs with the formation of DMT and EG. Catalyst

including Mn, Mg, Co and Zn are used to allow the transesterification reaction to occur.

DMT is distilled via the reaction providing high quality grade material. This ensures a

purified DMT free from physical contaminates (Mathews 2002; Scheirs 1998).

Page 59: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

34

O

O

C CH2 CH2OC

C

O CH2 CH2OHOH+

CH2 CH2OH O

O

CC

O

O CH2 CH2OH + Oligomers

BHET

n

MeOH

O

O

C CH3C

C

OCH3 + CH2 CH2OHOH

DMT

PETEG

Figure 2.6.5-2 Stereochemistry reaction of DMT extraction from Polymerisation of PET

via Glycolysis reaction

Advantages of this depolymerised process are high quality grade DMT, equivalent to

that found in virgin polymerisation processes. One other benefit is the ease of purifying

DMT when compared to BHET via the glycolysis reaction. One other benefit as

demonstrated via the reaction shown in figure 2.6.5-2 is the recovery of methanol and

EG. Another advantage of methanolysis is the depolymerisation of PC-PET bottle

material into clear DMT and EG for production of RPET (Kosmidis et al. 2001; Scheirs

1998)..

Page 60: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

35

2.7. Mechanical Testing

2.7.1. Izod Impact Test. This research study will focus on izod impact test for Voridian CA12, SkyPET BB7755

and Visy RPET injection moulded samples. Impact test is a commonly used method in

which a pendulum is released to collide with a specimen of known dimensions. There

are two methods used in the field to determine the brittleness or ductility of a given

material. Both methods employ a pendulum with stored energy to collide into a

specimen and record the energy absorbed to break each sample.

Many factors influence the results gathered for impact testing. These include service

temperatures during test conditions, type of notch used, processing temperatures to

manufacture test samples and process used to manufacture each test specimen.

Furthermore, the conditioning method used and notch depth and radius types have

detrimental effects on the final result.

Therefore, limitations to each test method exist. A poor correlation is observed between

test data results and product performance. Furthermore, variations in test results from

different testing agencies can occur. The impact resistance of a PET material properties

provides valuable information on a materials ability to withstand accidental knocks

within a field of application (Crawford 1998). In practice, the energy observed to break a

test specimen for izod and charpy impact test provide initial strength of polymer

materials.

Page 61: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

36

In practice, the impact behaviour of PET materials is influenced by the applied stress.

This triaxial displacement promotes brittleness within the material (Brostow et al. 1986;

Crawford 1998). Studies have shown notch type specimen depth and temperature affect

the impact energy observed to break each specimen (Crawford 1998).

Izod impact tests are useful for quality control and specification purposes, however not

for the prediction of end product performance of polymer applications (Crawford 1998).

Impact strength of polymers when following test method ISO 180 are defined as the

energy to break per unit area (J/m2) or energy to break per unit width (J/m) as set out by

ASTM D 256.

2.7.2. Tensile Testing Tensile testing analysis is important to understand a give PET materials strength and

stiffness characteristics when compared to RPET materials. Knowledge concerning the

materials viscoelastic properties provides the engineer an understanding to the materials

behaviour under stress, and its response to strain as a function of temperature and time

during testing (Crawford 1998). A materials relative stiffness can also be understood

utilising tensile testing measurements.

This is an important mechanical property, providing an understanding to the elastic

limits to each material. Previous work has demonstrated an increase in tensile properties,

as well as elongational properties with RPET blend (Fann et al. 1996). However, very

little published work is available concerning the tensile properties for PET – RPET

blends by way of heat-set beverage container applications. Chapter 7.1 presents results

Page 62: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

37

for tensile testing; Young modulus (E) and tensile properties to the panel side wall via

optimised SkyPET BB7755 – RPET blends are discussed in chapter 7.7.5.

2.8. Rheological Characteristics Rheological characterisation of all materials will be determined by applied shear rate

(γ& ) and constant temperature to obtain rheological data and predict its performance.

Two methods have been developed for analytical purposes. The first method includes a

cone and plate viscometer, sometimes referred to as rheological spectrometer (RMS)

(Chung 2000a).

The second requires a parallel plate viscometer. For this study, a parallel plate

viscometer is used to characterise Voridian CA12, SkyPET BB7755 and Visy RPET test

samples.

Rheological measurements are widely used in the field of material flow characterisation.

Steady Flow viscosity and Dynamic Viscosity is used to characterise a materials

viscosity (η ), shear storage modulus (G′ ) and shear loss modulus (G ′′ ). Rheological

measurements have also been used to determine a material’s Mw and MWD.

Furthermore, a materials viscosity - shear rate dependence can often be expressed in a

power law form as shown in equation 2.8-1.

Page 63: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

38

( ) ( )1−•= noγηγη &&

Equation 2.8-1

Where

oη = Viscosity at zero shear

n = power law exponent

γ& = shear rate

2.8.1. Parallel Plate Rheometer Parallel plate viscometers observe the measured shear stress (σ ) applying a controlled

shear rate (γ& ) within measured time. The measured (σ ) within parallel plate rheometers

is located at the outer radius of the parallel disk (γ& a). This expressed in equation 2.8.1-1.

This type of viscometer was initially developed to observe rheological properties of

rubber (Baird et al. 1998; Mooney 1947).

HRa ωγ =

Equation 2.8.1-1

Where

ω = Angular velocity (rad / sec)

R = Radius of outer disk (m)

H = Gap between plates (m)

Page 64: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

39

These types of viscometers generally apply low shear rates to the test samples. Cone and

plate viscometers apply lower shear rates (γ& ) when compared with parallel plates. This

is to prevent the sample from fracture and losing contact between the plate faces during

execution of experiments (Baird et al. 1998; Mooney 1947). Due to low shear rated (γ& )

applied and limitation expressed, parallel plate rheometer was used to characterise PET

samples.

2.9. Dilute Solution Viscosity Viscometric characterisation of polymer solutions is useful to the experimentalist. The

molecular number ( nΜ ), viscosity ( vΜ ), and weight ( wΜ ) average molecular weight

and molecular weight distribution (MWD) determines end use application for PET

materials (Cha 1964; Painter et al. 1994). The viscosity of a fluid is the measure of a

materials resistance to flow. This relationship reflects the frictional forces between

molecules (Chuah H. et al. 2001). As the dissolved polymer is present in solvent

solutions, polymer molecules slide past the solvent solution molecules. This results in an

increase in the solvent solution viscosity. The resulting viscosity measurements provide

a measure between the single point viscosity (η ) of a polymer solution and its number

( nΜ ) and weight ( wΜ ) average molecular weight.

The viscometric characterisation technique Intrinsic Viscosity (IV) provides quantitative

measurements of a materials degree of branching, polymer dimensions, and chain

flexibility. nΜ and wΜ of a PET material can be determined by the Mark –Houwink –

Sakurada (M-H-S) equation (Chuah et al. 2001).

Page 65: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

40

The number average molecular weight ( nΜ ) for all samples where first calculated using

the M-H-S equation αη nkΜ=][ . Constant k and α are not universal constants. These

constants vary with polymer type, temperature and solvent used (Cha 1964; Painter et al.

1994). However, this equation is not an absolute method for the determination of

molecular weight. The values represented are apparent molecular weight measurements

due to the theoretical interpretations for k and α are incomplete (Cha 1964;

Hergenrother et al. 1974)

In standard IV measurements, solution viscosity is measured at three different

concentrations and in triplicates (Chuah et al. 2001). Final results are plotted on a

Huggins or Kraemer logarithmic plot and extrapolated to zero concentration (Chuah et

al. 2001). This method is time consuming and is extremely expensive. A method has

been devised to calculate the apparent single point IV. Measuring the specific viscosity

( spη ) and relative viscosity ( relη ) at one specific concentration can approximate single

point IV (Grulke et al. 1999; Hergenrother et al. 1974).

Mark Houwink constants have been well tabulated for numerous PET materials and

solvents (Barth et al. 1991; Torres N et al. 2000). There are numerous constants k and

α published for 60:40 Chlorophenol / Tetrachloroethane solvents at 25 oC (Cha 1964;

Painter et al. 1994) . However very little is published for k and α for solvent mixture

60:40 Chlorophenol / Tetrachloroethane at 30 oC

The M-H-S k constant of gdL /1021 4−× and α 0.58 constants are reported for

polymer dissolved in 60/40 w/w phenol / tetrachloroethane at 30 °C by titration (Cha

Page 66: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

41

1964; Hergenrother et al. 1974). This equation is used to determine the Mn average for

all PET samples used in this work. Equation 2.8-1 is used to determine the Mn average

via measured IV data

58.041021 nM××= −η

Equation 2.9-1

Care needs to be exercised when wΜ less than or equal to 20,000 g / mol. Although low

η measurements are recorded, the M-H-S equations relation is not valid at low wΜ .

Researchers concluded this phenomenon is due to the molecules becoming wormlike in

behaviour at low molecular weight. The result is the non-Gaussian behaviour of short

chain molecules (Moore 1960).

The weight average molecular weights ( wΜ ) for PET can be approximated from single

point IV According to Equation 2.8.2:-.

68.041068.4 wM××= −η

Equation 2.9-2

This equation was used to determine the molecular weight average ( wΜ ) of all PET

samples. The equation was developed using Gel Permeation Chromatography (GPC)

with solvent mixture of 60:40 phenol / tetrachloroethane at 25 oC (Moore 1960).

Page 67: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

42

2.9.1. Melt Flow Index Test The melt flow index (MFI) test is the most common test used to characterise materials.

However, MFI measures single point viscosity results at a very low shear rate (Rosato et

al. 1989). Decisions to use MFI equipment are due to its low capital outlays and it’s

simplicity of use.

MFI is used to characterise the processability of a polymer. The test method has extreme

simplicity and is well understood within the industry. MFI is a constant shear stress

capillary rheometer (Whelan et al. 1988) . The test method requires a know weight

(force) applied for a period, producing an accurate weight of molten polymer. As

polymer melts are viscoelastic in behaviour, time is given during the test for the polymer

to reach a steady – state flow. The molten polymer is extruded through a predefined

orifice at a specific temperature for a period of time. The results are reported as weight

of extrudate (g) per ten minutes.

However, limitations exist due to the short capillary length used. Generally, the length to

diameter (L/D) ratio is 3.818 with a flat entry angle (90o). Such geometric characteristics

emphasize the elasticity of a material melt. The elastic response during testing affects

the materials MFI results. At high shear rates (γ& ), shear stress (σ ) are exceeded,

resulting in melt fracture. Materials with the same MFI results can vary in viscosity and

elasticities (Chung 2000c)

As mentioned previously, MFI is a low shear rate test. Loads of 2.16 kg result in force of

21.2 N. Shear rates can vary depending on load and temperatures used during

Page 68: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

43

experiments, as well as the materials themselves because they are generally shear

thinning. A 21 kg load can yield shear rates of approximately 300 s-1

, depending on the

viscosity of the melt.

Polymers can demonstrate the same MFI value – single point viscosity – for a single

point measurement. Plotting viscosity curves at varying forces demonstrate varying

viscosities and elastic properties at increase shear rate (γ& ) levels used to characterise

each material (Chung 2000a). The shear sensitivity to a given polymer can be

determined using MFI measured with varying weights. Varied temperatures can be

applied to a material to determine materials temperature sensitivity without changing the

applied force (Chung 2000a).

A materials viscoelastic response, in this case die swell ratio can be obtained via MFI

equipment. Die swell ratio is determined by equation 2.9.2-1

2

⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛=

C

e

DDSR

Equation 2.9.1-1

DC

= capillary diameter

De = extrudate diameter

Two procedures are used to date for MFI. ASTM D 1238 method A utilises a manual cut

off procedure, used for materials with flow rates between 0.15 to 50 g / 10 min. (Whelan

et al. 1988). Materials are equilibrated within the MFI equipment for 3 minutes duration.

This allows proper heat-soak time for each material. Materials are recorded once the first

Page 69: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

44

reference mark is level to the top of the barrel instrument. During this time, material is

frequently cut from the MFI machine until the top reference mark is inline with the top

of the barrel instrument. To calculate flow rate, expressed as g / 10 minutes, Equation

2.9.2-2 is used

tM

MFI p 600×=

Equation 2.9.1-2

t = cut off interval in seconds

Mp = mass of extruded polymer (grams)

Method B incorporates an automated process to measure the flow rate for polymer

materials with flow rates of 0.50 – 1200 grams / 10 minutes (Whelan et al. 1988).

2.10. Thermal Analysis Thermal Analysis is an established technique for measuring thermal events arising from

physical and chemical changes during experimentation. Its primary function is to

measure energy difference from a reference sample and the test sample as a function of

temperature and time within a controlled temperature environment (Blaine 2004;

Danley. 2003; Ramachandran 2002).

2.10.1. Crystallinity measured via Differential Scanning Calorimetry

Many techniques are used to investigate the thermal behaviour of polymer materials.

One such technique used is Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC). This technique

measures the heat flow to a particular sample, as temperature is varied whilst applying a

Page 70: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

45

controlled temperature program (Fann et al. 1996). DSC enables the measurement of

enthalpy changes within the first order transition (ASTM D3417).

Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC) – as well as other techniques – is used in

measuring the crystallinity ( χ ) of polymers. However, very little is understood

concerning the crystallisation kinetics of RPET for PET bottle applications. Studies have

found RPET materials exhibit increased levels of Tg temperature, tensile and impact

strength. Demonstrated improvements to RPET blends elongation properties are shown

when compared to virgin PET injection moulding samples (Fann et al. 1996; Schawe

1995). Furthermore, current research has shown RPET materials demonstrate a

reduction in elongation at break during tensile testing. This is attributed to variations in

crystallinity and level of contaminants found in RPET materials when compared with

virgin PET (Torres et al. 2000).

2.10.2. Temperature Modulated Differential Scanning Calorimetry

TMDSC provides unique information, which is not possible with DSC. The measure of

heat flow (Φ ) is common for both DSC and TMDSC methods. However, TMDSC

measure heat capacity and well as heat flow (Cser et al. 1997). The conventional DSC

method applies an isothermal or linear heating or cooling ramp to the test sample (Cser

et al. 1997; Schawe 1995). TMSDC is further improved by applying a sinusoidal

temperature oscillation curve to the sample (Thomas 2004). This sinusoidal modulation

(Ta) is overlaid to the linear heating ramp or cooling change with an applied angular

frequency ( oω ). The heat flow rate of the sample can be calculated by adding the

Page 71: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

46

reversing heat flow ( revΦ ) and non reversing heat flow ( nonΦ ) curve of the reference

pan (Danley. 2003; Schawe 1995).

The underlying heat flow rate (Φ ) can be determined via DSC and TMDSC

instrumentations. However, TMDSC is capable of measuring the reversing heat flow

( revΦ ), a function of heat capacity and the non-reverse heat flow ( nonΦ ), that is the

kinetic behaviour. The nonΦ component is the difference between the deconvoluted heat

flow rate ( dcΦ ) and the reversing component of heat flow ( revΦ ) (Cser et al. 1998).

TMDSC superimposes a sinusoidal temperature change with the inclusion of angular

frequency and defined amplitude over a conventional DCS temperature program

(Schawe 1995). The temperature change within a TMDSC is governed by equation

2.10.2-1

( ) )cos( tTTtQ ooo ωβ ++=

Equation 2.10.2-1

Where

To = is the starting temperature

oβ = is the underlying scanning rate

T = Temperature

ω = is the modulation frequency = ptπ2 (s-1)

pt = time period

t = Time (s)

Page 72: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

47

The assumed heat flow rate ( tΦ ) into a given sample is governed by equation 2.10.2-2

( ) ( )

( ) ( ) ( )

kinrevt

pt

ptotal

t

TtfdtdTTtfTC

TtfdtdTTC

dtdQ

Φ+Φ=Φ

⎥⎦⎤

⎢⎣⎡ ++=Φ

+=⎟⎠⎞

⎜⎝⎛=Φ

,,

,

1

Equation 2.10.2-2

Where

totaldtdQ

⎟⎠⎞

⎜⎝⎛ = tΦ = total heat flow

pC = heat capacity

dtdT = underlying heating rate

( )Ttf , = the kinetic component of the heat flow rate

T = Temperature (Kelvin)

revΦ = Reversing Heat flow

kinΦ = Non Reversing Heat Flow

Once these differential equations are solved, we are able to determine the reversing heat

flow ( revΦ ) – the thermodynamic behaviour – and the non-reversing ( nonΦ ) heat flow,

that is related to the materials kinetic behaviour. The revΦ is the total heat flow

multiplied by the overall rate of temperature change (β ) as expressed in equation

2.10.2-3 (Buehler et al. 1998; Cser et al. 1998).

Page 73: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

48

( ) ( ) β∗−=⎟⎠⎞

⎜⎝⎛=Φ TC

dTdQT p

T

revrev

Equation 2.10.2-3

The nonΦ is expressed in equation 2.10.2-4 where

( )Ttfnon ,=Φ

Equation 2.10.2-4

The heat capacity (Cp) is derived after deconvolution of the modulated heat flow from

equation 2.10.2-5 (Buehler et al. 1998; Cser et al. 1998).

( ) ][( )[ ] ω

1)(

3

3)( 3 tAsmooth

tAsmoothkTC

T

HFCpTTTp =−

Equation 2.10.2-5

HFA = amplitude of instant heat flow signal at t time (mW)

TA = amplitude of temperature signal at t time (K)

ω = angular frequency (s-1)

TMDSC can also be used to measure the thermal diffusivity of a polymer as expressed

in equation 2.10.2-6 (Cser et al. 1998).

pCKρ

α =

Equation 2.10.2-6

Page 74: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

49

Where

K = the thermal conductivity of a given material ( Co mW/M ⋅ ).

α = thermal diffusivity

ρ = Melt density

pC = Specific Heat

2.10.3. Molecular Weight Distribution TA Instruments have developed a method to determine MWD via TMDSC (Blaine et al.

2004) . This method is outside the current method used from rheometeric data obtained

during rheological characterisation. It is not designed to replace Gel Permeation

Chromatography (GPC) or Side Exclusion Chromatography (SEC), however is seen to

be complimentary to existing analytical techniques (Smith 2002).

2.11. Crystallinity and Density Several factors affect the crystallinity ( cχ ) of a PET material. These include molecular

size, steric orientation, MWD and degree of branching, including fillers and additives

used (Bashir et al. 2000; Cassel et al. 1998). The initial crystallinity ( cχ ) and density of

the amorphous ( aρ ) and crystalline ( cρ ) region of a PET bottle can be determined from

traditional DSC and Temperature Modulated Differential Scanning Calorimetry

(TMDSC) (Bashir et al. 2000; Cassel et al. 1998). Fakirov and Daubeny have developed

aρ and cρ data lists which are used to reference density results for 100 percent

Page 75: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

50

amorphous and 100 percent crystalline PET materials (Fakirov S 1997). Discrepancies

in aρ and cρ for PET resins have been reported when compared with small angle x-ray

(SAXS) measurements obtained (Bashir et al. 2000). Although SAXS is an important

tool to determine polymer crystallinity, there are still questions concerning its accuracy

when compared to other measuring techniques (Gruver et al. 2000).

Other methods used for determining polymer crystallinity include Fourier transform

spectrometry (FTIR), DSC and x-ray diffraction (XRD). Some suggest FTIR to be the

most valuable analytical method for determining polymer crystallinity (Gruver et al.

2000).

A gradient column is one method used to determine polymer density. It is the most

commonly used instrument for obtaining density values for PET (Bashir et al. 2000;

Schiavone 2002a). It is a sound technique, demonstrating repeatable results when

determining density of PET materials (Bashir et al. 2000). The test condition used is in

accordance with ASTM D 1505 – 85. Calibration of the density column uses glass bead

density standards.

An additional measure of density is via ASTM D 792 test method. The test method

provides specific gravity data, also obtaining the density of a solid. This method is

simple to use, and enables the measurement of changing crystallinity and density values.

Page 76: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

51

2.12. Heat-set Process Physical properties for PET are determined by the materials degree of crystallinity and

its degree of orientation. Morphology of PET materials also affect the barrier properties

of the material (Caldicott 1998; Gaydosh et al. 2000; Jabarin 1995). Furthermore,

preform and bottle design play an important role for temperature resistant PET beverage

containers at elevated temperatures (Jabarin 1995). Wall thickness distribution,

influenced via process optimisation contribute to the final physical properties of a PET

beverage container (Jabarin 1984). Preform surface temperatures have also been

demonstrated to influence the final hot-fill (S2) shrinkage

Traditional PET carbonated soft drink markets (CSD) bottle production do not

incorporate heated moulds in the production cycle. The result is a beverage container not

suitable for hot-fill applications. A simple experiment to demonstrate this phenomenon

is the filling of a PET container with boiled water which is allowed to stand. Due to the

materials relatively low Tg of 72 oC, the molecules within the container relax, allowing

for dimensional changes, and therefore a reduction in hot-fill volume (V2).

Thermal processing of oriented PET containers, which is known as ‘heat-setting’,

introduces thermal crystallinity, hence increasing the glass transition temperature (Tg) of

PET. The process utilises traditional PET bottle production techniques, however

involves holding the container against a heated (above 115 oC) mould for a period of

time (approximately 1 – 60 seconds) before ejecting the blown container (Boyd et al.

2002b; Jabarin 1983; Potter et al. 2001). Heat-setting and its various forms yield

Page 77: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

52

increased ‘hot-fill temperatures’ at which the food content is filled at elevated

temperatures.

True Heat-set TM process increases the level of crystallinity (30 percent and higher) in

the sidewall of a beverage container. This method utilises traditional ISBM techniques,

incorporating a high temperature gas during the blow moulding inflation cycle. This gas

is introduced via the stretch rod. The temperature of the high pressurised gas ranges

from 285 to 370 oC. The pressurised gas is combined with a fluid mixture to inflate the

heated preform against a heated mould cavity (130 – 170 oC) to induce crystallinity. This

process is maintained between 3 – 7 seconds or until the require level of crystallinity is

obtained. High air pressure is used to inflate the preform against the mould cavity. This

method increases the crystallinity during the blow moulding cycle.

Although an increase in crystallinity is achieved, transparency is maintained due to the

small spherulitic (crystal size) structure. The container undergoes annealing (relieving

the stress and strain within the molecules) during this process (Maruhashi et al. 1996).

Furthermore, work at Schmalbach-Lubeca AG demonstrated that dimensional stability

of a PET container is controlled via the draw ratio, stretch speed and temperature of

stretching (Boyd et al. 2002a; Potter et al. 2001). Similar results have been demonstrate

from previous work undertaken on heat-set PET film structures (Maruhashi et al.

1992b).

Limitations exist in conventional beverage containers utilising heat-set technology.

These limitation include a decrease in refractive index with increased crystallinity

(Maruhashi et al. 1992b). Furthermore, the inclusion of vacuum panels is used to

suppress hot-fill (S2) shrinkage when exposed to pasteurisation, hot-fill and retort

Page 78: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

53

processes. For retort process, food spoilage is controlled by heating the produce to

between 100 – 121 oC for a duration of 1 hour (Tekkanat 2000). The molecular weight

(Mw) or more frequently referenced the intrinsic value (IV) of a material decreases

during processing. It has been found that a reduction in IV from 0.85 dl/g to 0.58 dl/g

leads to a reduction in the degree of crystallinity by a factor of two (Silberman et al.

1998)

At present, researcher are investigating increases in the initial crystallinity to a PET

material whilst maintaining optical clarity. A unique heat-set method is used to increase

the crystallinity level to over 50 percent whilst maintaining glass like clarity (Boyd et al.

2002b). A mould temperature of 250 oC is used (Ajmera 1989; Jabarin 1983; Jabarin

1995).

This method incorporates a change in heating oil within the mould and circulating a

continuous flow of oil at room temperature, cooling the container after inflation and

heat-setting. Although an increase in crystallinity is achieved – ensuring optical clarity –

such a container cannot be withdrawn from the process at high temperature. Doing so

would allow the container to collapse, as the PET material is close to Tm. One known

disadvantage to this technology is an increase in cycle times. An increase in cycle time

is required to reduce the temperature of the PET container from a material temperature

of 250 oC to the quench temperature – varying from 170 – 148 °C via the continuous

flow of oil.

Time and temperature are important considerations when producing dimensionally

stable PET beverage containers. Mechanical and physical properties for hot-fill

Page 79: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

54

applications need to be considered. Previous studies shown on PET sheets incorporating

draw ratios of 3:3 and increased stretch rate increase the percentage crystallinity at low

heat-set (85 oC) temperatures (Maruhashi 2001). At relative low heat-set temperatures,

the rate of dimensional stability also improved due to the stretch speeds. This promotes

strain induced crystallinity, raising the temperature of the preform before inflation (Boyd

2004; Maruhashi 2001). Therefore, dimensional stability is controlled via increased

heat-set temperatures and the draw ratio and speed of stretching. Heat-set temperatures

above 110 oC with increased blow time or increasing heat-set temperature likewise

increases in percentage crystallinity.

Morphology of the final heat-set material is dependant of the original PET material

(Maruhashi et al. 1992b). At low draw ratios (1.6:1.6) with a stretching speed of 2.5

m/min, an increase in heat-set temperatures do not provided increased levels of

crystallinity. A combination of medium draw ratio (2.1:2.1) found increased levels of

crystallinity. Increased draw ratios within increase heat-set temperatures saw small

increases in crystallinity, however little or no change observed in the amorphous region

(Maruhashi et al. 1992b). Stretch speed, draw ratio at low temperatures have

demonstrated similar physical properties and thermal stability when compared to high

heat-set applications. Further studies have been undertaken into investigating increased

draw ratios and stretch rates similar to ISBM process (Maruhashi 2001). Factors

affecting the percentage crystallinity and dimensional stability via heat-setting

methodologies have demonstrated results obtained previous (Maruhashi et al. 1992b).

Page 80: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

55

Heat-set process increases the level of crystallinity whilst decreasing the crystal size to

the material. This ensures the crystallites are small enough to be seen as an amorphous

material, even though the container has high degree of crystallinity (Brooks 2000).

Current literature demonstrates low heat-set temperatures improved thermal stability

with increased stretch speeds and draw ratios. Further studies are needed to gain

additional knowledge concerning PET morphological changes in the amorphous density

and crystalline regions rendered by the heat-set process. A comprehensive understanding

of the ISBM process conditions is necessary. This requires additional knowledge

concerning virgin - RPET blends, observing possible improvements for hot-fill

applications.

2.13. Mechanical response via Strain Induced Crystallinity

The degree of crystallinity is an important characteristic for thermal stability. However

this parameter is not the only determinant required to improve dimensional stability of

beverage containers at elevated temperatures via the heat-set process. Properties

including modulus of elasticity, transparency and tensile strength are affected by

crystallinity and its distribution in the morphology phase. (Caldicott 1998; Silberman et

al. 1998). Process conditions including the preform temperature, mould temperature,

blow pressure, stretch duration and heat-set temperature and blow time influence the

final mechanical properties.

Page 81: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

56

The manufacturing process of PET containers requires the PET preform be heated above

the Tg value. In general terms a preform temperature of 15 oC above the Tg temperature

and closer to the Tc of the material is sought (Silberman et al. 1998; Tekkanat 2000).

Prior to the inflation process, the preform is stretched in an axial direction. Air is

inflated into the preform blowing the material in a biaxial direction against the mould.

To demonstration this phenomenon, place a PET bottle in an oven for one hour,

allowing quiescent cooling to take place. Upon completion, shrinkage of the container

shapes tries to shrink into its previous shape. In this case the original preform prior to

inflation or stretching. However, part of the strain has exceeded the elastic point of the

material. Thus a non recoverable deformation has taken place, as the stretch ratio has

exceeded the yield point of the material. Surpassing the yield point the molecules begin

to realign themselves in the axial direction. The preform, under load via the stretch rod,

compels the molecules to slip past themselves realigning in the stretching direction. The

material begins to reach a strain hardening point. This behaviour is temperature, speed

of stretching and Mw dependent. At this point the molecules become rigid due to

established entanglements. During stretching in the axial direction, molecules rotate and

uncoil. As a result strain induced crystallisation takes place (Silberman et al. 1998;

Tekkanat. 2000).

2.14. Morphology of PET Beverage Bottles Crystalline PET materials can be processed demonstrating glasslike clarity.

Alternatively, in the presence of quiescence cooling, molecules reorient into densely

packed molecules forming spherulitic macrostructures – being the crystalline region of

the polymer – and non-spherulitic portions. This non-spherulitic portion of the polymer

Page 82: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

57

matrix represents the random arrangement of molecules, inturn effecting the amorphous

region (Jabarin 1995). This combination of crystalline and amorphous region influences

whether the PET container will demonstrate clear or opaque appearance. These

attributes are controlled via the ISBM process condition (Silberman et al. 1998).

This changing morphology is also influenced by the exposure to cooling time and

temperature of the mould during the blow moulding process (Jabarin 1996). PET

materials cooled above the Tg rapidly will increase spherulitic macrostructures in the

beverage container, hence changing the final morphological properties. The result is an

increase in random molecular structure. An increase in the amorphous region, and

decrease in the crystalline region, giving glass like transparency is the result. However,

quiescence cooling can also effect the morphology of the material, increasing the

crystalline region, and give the material an opaque appearance (Jabarin 1995).

Many studies have investigated the effects of thermal stability of PET made from sheets

or fibre incorporating heat-set experimental condition. Literature has shown improved

thermal stability of PET materials under heat-setting condition (Groeninckx et al. 1980a;

Jabarin 1983; Jabarin 1995; Maruhashi et al. 1992a). However, the literature survey

found very little concerning experimental conditions for ISBM bottle containers under a

heat-set application, although widely used within industry (Billmeyer 1984).

However it has been shown that in the absence of heat-set process, shrinkage is mainly

influenced via the degree of draw ratio (Maruhashi et al. 1992a; Silberman et al. 1998).

The stretch ratio also has an influence on the final crystallinity value after inflation. For

a material of 0.85 dl/g IV, crystallinity increases from 4 to 31 percentage with an

Page 83: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

58

increase in stretch ratio from 1 to 5.8 (Silberman et al. 1998). Variation in Tg is reported.

Silberman reports as a function of stretch rate (SR) the outer layer of the PET beverage

container to yield the highest Tg value, with the inner layer in the same location

reporting the lowest value.

Furthermore, three regions of crystallinity values are reported as a function of stretch

ratio (SR). Changes in crystallinity are related to the panel thickness and (SR) conditions

(Silberman et al. 1998). The material closest to the mould cavity undergoes the greatest

increase in crystallinity with high SR. This has been attributed to the initial rapid

annealing when first contact is made with the blow mould cavity. As the material cools,

an increase in crystallinity is due to further stretching, resulting in strain induced

crystallinity (Jabarin 1992). At low crystallinity, draw ratio leads to molecular

relaxation, with no increase in crystallinity with heat-set present (Maruhashi et al.

1992b). Other studies have found similar results (Maruhashi 2001; Maruhashi et al.

1996; Silberman et al. 1998).

Maruhashi et al (1996) found that for PET polymers with high (SR) greater than 2,

higher crystallinity is produced. Furthermore this work observed this improvement with

low heat-set temperatures (85 oC). The improved dimensionally stable material was

determined to have an improved relaxation in the tie molecules in the amorphous region

of the polymer. An increase in amorphous density is observed due to increase draw ratio

and higher stretch speed. The result is fewer unconstrained molecular entanglements

within the amorphous region hence an increase in thermal stability at elevated

temperatures.

Page 84: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 2 Literature Review

59

Much of the has been focused on virgin and RPET blends for injection moulded

applications (Maruhashi et al. 1996; Nobbs et al. 1976). Some work has also been done

on PET films for heat-set applications (Groeninckx et al. 1980a; Groeninckx et al.

1980b; Maruhashi 2001). Only limited reported information exists for PET bottle heat

set bottle manufacture (Liu et al. 2004; Mc Chesney et al. 1983).

The perceived benefits for hot-fill applications due to RPET reported physical and

mechanical properties are yet to be well documented for virgin - RPET blends. The

influence on crystallinity, and its change on Tg and dimensional stability (S2) at elevated

heat-set temperature with the inclusion of RPET blends must be explored. Furthermore,

maintaining industry accepted process shrinkage (S1) at elevated heat-set temperatures

needs to be addressed and defined.

Page 85: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 3 Materials, Sample Preparation and Experimental Set-up

60

3. Chapter 3: Materials, Sample Preparation and

Experimental Set-up

Page 86: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 3 Materials, Sample Preparation and Experimental Procedures

61

3.1. Introduction Chapter 3 presents PET materials used for this research study in heat-set application for

Injection Stretch Blow Moulding process (ISBM). A description of each thermal and

mechanical characterisation is included. Sample preparations and experimental

procedures used are incorporated and discussed. The following lists experimental

characterisation techniques used. These include:-

Intrinsic Viscosity Test (IV)

Melt Flow Index Test (MFI)

Thermal Characterisation via Temperature Modulated Differential Scanning Calorimetry

(TMDSC)

Injection Stretch Blow Moulding Process (ISBM)

Rheological Characterisation via Advanced Rheometric Expansion System (ARES)

Parallel-Plate Rheometer,

Burst Strength test

Top Load Strength test

Tensile Test

Hot Fill test

Characterisation of each raw material used in this research study allows evaluations of

each materials rheological, morphological, physical and mechanical properties.

Page 87: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 3 Materials, Sample Preparation and Experimental Procedures

62

3.2. Materials for Heat Set Applications Three grades of polyethylene terephthalate have been chosen for investigation of hot-fill

applications. Voridian CA12 was obtained from Eastman Chemical Company. SK

Chemicals SkyPET BB 7755 homopolymer was obtained from SK Chemicals and Visy

recycled polyethylene terephthalate (RPET) food grade pallets were obtained from Visy

Plastics, Australia.

Voridian CA12 is a copolymer material based on isopropyl alcohol (IPA) glycol

monomer, with low parts per million (ppm) of activated carbon. This enhances

temperature uniformity of the preform prior to stretching within the ISBM process. The

material application is generally designed for two stage ISBM processes.

SkyPET BB 7755 is homopolymer material specifically designed for hot-fill applications

with a low level of acetalaldehyde (AA). SkyPET BB7755 material is manufactured using

Antimony (Sb) as the catalyst.

Visy RPET material is manufactured from PC-PET material. RPET has an IV of 0.76

dL/g

The basic properties of each material obtained from the material manufacturer are

outlined in table 3.2-1 and 3.2-2

Page 88: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 3 Materials, Sample Preparation and Experimental Procedures

63

Table 3.2-1 Thermal, physical and mechanical properties of SkyPET BB7755 PET Material Used

PROPERTY BB 7755

Property UNIT VALUE TEST METHOD

Intrinsic Viscosity dL/ g 0.76 ± 0.02 SK Chemicals Method

Melting Temperature oC 253 ± 1 DSC

Density g / cm3 1.40 ± 0.01 ASTM D 1505

Bulk Density kg / cm3 880 kg/cm3 ASTM 1895

Acetaldehyde ppm 1 MAX SK Chemicals Method

CIE b* 1 MAX SK Chemicals Method

Moisture wt % 0.3 MAX Karl-Fisher Method

Ignition Temperature oC 375 oC SK Chemicals Method

Pellet Size mm 1.9 x 2.7

Table 3.2-2 Thermal, physical and mechanical properties of SkyPET BB7755 PET Material Used

PROPERTY CA 12

Properties UNIT VALUE TEST METHOD

Intrinsic Viscosity dL/ g 0.82 ± 0.02 Voridian Test Method

Melting Temperature oC 250 OC ± 1 DSC

Acetaldehyde ppm 1 max Voridian Test Method

Heat of Fusion kJ/kg 60 kJ/kg Voridian Test Method

Cp @ 23°C) kJ/kg·K 1.2 kJ/kg·K DSC

Cp @ 80°C kJ/kg·K 1.5 kJ/kg·K DSC

Cp @ 100°C kJ/kg·K 1.7 kJ/kg·K DSC

Cp @ 200°C kJ/kg·K 2.1 kJ/kg·K DSC

Cp @ 280°C kJ/kg·K 2.3 kJ/kg·K DSC

Pellet Size mm 2.5 mm

Page 89: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 3 Materials, Sample Preparation and Experimental Procedures

64

3.3. Raw Material Preparation Virgin and RPET blends incorporated a Maguire 100 Series Weigh Scale Blender (WSB).

This unit was chosen for its accuracy in material blending formulations to an accuracy of

0.1 % of requested formulation (MAGUIRE 2004).

3.4. Material dying conditions for PET Care was taken not to affect each material’s physical and chemical properties. Molecular

weight ( wM ) as indicated by the materials’ intrinsic viscosity (IV) is important to the

manufacturing process of PET bottles. The material had been subject to drying before

ISBM and injection moulding (IM) process. PET, a hydroscopic material is subjected to

control drying with inlet temperature of 153 oC for 5.5 hours. An optimum pellet dwell

time for PET is suggested at approximately 6 hours (Voridian Pty Ltd 2002). Dew point

less than -20 oC was observed with an airflow rate of 0.045 m3 / (kg). A good dryer

design criterion allows 0.062 m3 / kg/h (Voridian Pty Ltd 2002). A hopper ratio of 4:1

was used during experiments. The hopper height to diameter (h/d) ratio should be 2:1, or

preferable 3:1 (Voridian Pty Ltd 2002). A total batch size of 10 kilograms (kg) was used

for each experimental run.

3.5. Sample preparation of compression moulded plaque

Compression moulded samples were prepared for rheological characterisation by ARES

parallel-plate rheometer. Voridian copolymer CA12, SkyPET homopolymer BB 7755 and

RPET (Visy) were dried in a vacuum oven at 100 oC for 24 hours. The compression-

moulded tool incorporated 4 heating cartridges maintaining temperature between the

Page 90: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 3 Materials, Sample Preparation and Experimental Procedures

65

upper and lower mould. Each mould was provided with separate temperature control

units.

A rectangular plaque was used to produce test samples by the compression moulding

process. Dimensions of length (l) 152 mm width (w) 153 mm thickness (h) 2 mm

were recorded. At the completion of the compression moulding cycle, unmelted PET

pellets were observed. An increase in residence time demonstrated polymer degradation

within localised areas of the test sample. Test specimens samples of 25 mm in diameter

were required for rheological testing. During the cutting process, PET material shattered.

No good samples were obtained from this test plaque. As sample preparation failed using

a rectangular plaque, a new approach was taken.

The new approach utilised a plaque comprising 9 25 mm diameter disk impressions

with a measured thickness of 2mm. A total of 9 rheological test specimens could be

produced by compression moulding. This mould showed improved melting of the PET

granules and degradation was eliminated during the compression moulding process. The

mould temperatures for each sample were set to 280 oC. The plaques produced were

suitable for the Rheological characterisation via the ARES Parallel Plate Rheometer.

An experimental procedure was developed to achieve optimum compression moulded

samples. Initial trials found un-molten granules suspended within a molten layer of

polymer at the conclusion of compression moulding. The cooling rate was not optimum,

nor efficient. During the cooling cycle, a temperature differential of 60 – 70 oC was

observed between top and bottom mould halves.

Page 91: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 3 Materials, Sample Preparation and Experimental Procedures

66

The mould required water cooling with the water inlet entering the top half of the

compression moulding tool. Water circulated from the top mould half, then exit and enter

the bottom half of the compression mould. Uneven cooling was observed, due to an

increase in fluid temperature from cooling the top mould. A decrease in heat transfer

capacity in cooling the 9 plaque 25 mm diameter PET plaque samples was the result..

During the compression moulding cycle, unmolten PET granules remained. This had been

corrected by increasing the residence time to three minutes before applying force to the

compression mould halves.

Uniform samples were obtained under the following conditions. PET granules were

removed from a vacuum oven and placed into 9 25 mm diameter sample plaque.

Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) sheets where incorporated to prevent PET material

sticking to the two-mould halves. This provided ease of separation under extreme

temperature environments.

PET material were placed between the mould halves at 250 oC and allowed to equilibrate

to temperature. Time taken for temperature to equilibrate to 280 oC was 7 minutes. Once

the equilibration of temperature was reached, a force of 150 kN was applied to the

moulds. PET materials were subjected to constant pressure and temperature for 3 minutes.

Mould temperatures were decreased to 150 oC, mould samples removed from the

compression moulding machine and further cooled in constant running tap water.

Samples were removed and placed in sealed bags.

Page 92: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 3 Materials, Sample Preparation and Experimental Procedures

67

3.6. Rheological characterisation Rheological characterisation of all materials were broken into three areas to improve

understanding of each material’s viscoelastic response to stress. Data obtained via each

experimental test were used to quantify results. Complex viscosity *)(η as a function of

stress and strain was compared. Storage, loss modulus (G′ andG ′′ ) and Tan Delta ( )δtan

were evaluated. This yields an understanding of each materials viscosity, elasticity and

glass transition temperature.

3.6.1. Analysis intrinsic viscosity of PET Experiments were taken to quantify the intrinsic viscosity ( )η to each PET material in

solution. The weight average molecular weight ( )wM and number average ( )nM

molecular weight were calculated. The test procedure is outlined by the American

Standard Test Method (ASTM) 4603 – 03, however modifications were made. Each test

sample was dried at 100 °C for 18 hours. PET granules where dissolved at concentrations

of 0.50% in a 60/40, w/w o-chlorophenol and 1,1,2,2 tetrachloroethane solvent mixture

The weight of each volumetric flask and lid was taken. Dried PET samples were

accurately weighed in the range of 0.1225 to 0.1275 g. Accuracy of 0.2 mg was required.

The solution mixture was measured to 25 ml total volume, and placed into a volumetric

flask. The combined contents were placed into a water bath with a set-point temperature

of 30 oC. Each solvent and sample mixture was allowed to equilibrate for 10 minutes.

Sample and solvent mixture were weighed and recorded at 30 oC. A PTFE coated stirring

bar was placed into the solvent mixture to assist with stirring material and solvent.

Page 93: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 3 Materials, Sample Preparation and Experimental Procedures

68

The volumetric flask was placed into a preheated canola oil bath (100 oC). Temperature

was maintained between 100 - 110 oC. This was to prevent degradation of each sample.

Each sample dissolved within 30 minutes. Once dissolved, the volumetric flask was

removed from the oil bath and cooled to room temperature. The solvent mixture was

allowed to cool for 30 minutes. The stirring bars where removed with a magnetic

retriever. Each solvent mixture was poured into Whatman #1 filter paper and drained into

dry 50 ml vials. Once completed, polypropylene (PP) caps were placed on each vial.

An AMV 200 Rolling Ball viscometer combined with a SP3-V sampler exchanger was

used to conduct the IV experiment. A water bath and IBM compatible personal computer

was used. The analysis routine was set to ASTM 4603 with a set temperature of 30 oC.

An inclination angle )(α of 70 o was applied.

3.6.2. Melt flow index test Material preparation was undertaken using ASTM method D 1238 – 01. Material was

dried in an oven with a set point temperature of 100 oC for 16 hours. Test conditions

included a temperature of 285 oC with a 2.16kg applied force. The orifice diameter of

2.092 mm was used. Length of the orifice is 8 mm.

Melt flow index results were recorded for SkyPET BB7755 and Voridian CA 12 for two-

minute duration. Due to increase flow rates for Visy RPET, a one-minute duration was

used. All results were extrapolated and expressed as grams per ten minutes. Each material

included a heat soak time of 3 minutes before the commencement of each test.

Page 94: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 3 Materials, Sample Preparation and Experimental Procedures

69

3.6.3. Parallel Plate Rheometer Parallel plate rheometric experiments were conducted to measure the Storage ( )G′ and

Loss ( )G′′ modulus. Furthermore, complex viscosity ( )*η and were also performed.

Sample preparations for parallel plate rheomter have been discussed in section 3.3. An

ARES – LS Rheometer from TA Instruments was used to conduct rheological

characterisations for each material. Software used was TA Orchestrator version 7.0.8.23.

Zero Motor inertia was applied to the rheometer. Test samples were conditioned within a

nitrogen (N2) atmosphere. As PET is hydroscopic, the inclusion of N2 prevents PET from

hydrolysis (Sonia. et al. 2001). This was used to minimise material degradation. Materials

where dried at 100 oC under vacuum for 24 hours prior to testing.

A 25 mm aluminium (Al) plate diameter with a 1.5 mm gap was set for each experiment.

A linear Viscoelastic Region (LVR) was established using a Dynamic Strain Sweep.

Equilibration time of 50 seconds was used. The samples were subjected to a 10 rad/s

frequency with 0.1 initial strain tested at 280 oC; a maximum of 400 % final strain was

applied. The software was set to record data at 10 points per decade in log mode. A pre-

shear of 10 s was applied to eliminate possible shear and molecular orientation remaining

from the compression moulding process. The pre shear time also allows for any molecular

structure to rebuild prior to testing (Mazzeo 2004).

In Dynamic Strain Frequency Sweep mode, a frequency of 0.1 to 100 rad/s was applied.

Strain amplitude of 300 % was used. A sampling rate of 10 points per decade in log mode

was used. A parallel plate gap of 1.5 mm was set for each experiment. Measurements

Page 95: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 3 Materials, Sample Preparation and Experimental Procedures

70

where performed at 280 oC. The Dynamic Strain Sweep experiments took 12 minutes to

complete for each material. Results and discussion are found in chapter 7.2

3.7. Thermal characterisation

3.7.1. Temperature modulated differential scanning calorimetry

Thermal analysis was performed using TA Instruments Temperature Modulated

Differential Scanning Calorimetry (TMDSC) 2920. The software used to analyse all data

points was performed utilising TA Instruments Universal Analysis Version 3.8. A

comprehensive understanding of each materials thermal and kinetic changes as a function

of time were analysed for this research study (Ramachandran 2002). TMDSC is similar to

Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC). Discussion concerning differences can be

located in chapters 2.9 and 2.9.1.

A compression moulder was used for sample preparation. During sample preparation,

PET granules where placed between compression moulding plates with a set-point

temperature of 270 oC. As materials were placed within the compression moulding plates,

a decrease in temperatures bewteen 8 to 10 oC was observed. It was found that the

temperature rose to the set point temperature within two to three minutes for each

material. A preheat time of three minutes was applied before the commencement of

moulding each samples. Clamp pressure of 150 kN force was applied for duration of three

minutes. At the completion of the compression moulding cycle time, test samples where

removed and quench cooled within tepid water.

Page 96: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 3 Materials, Sample Preparation and Experimental Procedures

71

Each test specimen were prepared for TMDSC analysis. A hole punch was used to

prepare a 6 mm test sample weighing between 8 to 10 milligrams (mg). Each test

specimen was placed into an Aluminium (Al) crucible. Each crucible was pressed and

placed directly within the TMDSC furnace and located onto the centre of each

thermocouple. Table 3.7.1-1 includes the weights for each test sample.

Table 3.7.1-1 TMDSC weight results for each material run

PET Sample Weight

BB7755 9.37 mg

CA 12 8.42 mg

Visy RPET 8.36 mg

Parameters for the TMDSC experiment included a Helium (He) gas flow rate of 30 ml

min –1 to purge the DSC cell. A refrigeration-cooling unit with 100 ml min –1 flow rate of

Nitrogen (N) was used for cooling the sample during each experiment. Indium was used

to calibrate the DSC. The heat capacity constant was calibrated with the heat capacity of

sapphire using a modulation amplitude of +/- 0.60 oC with a period (p) equal to 40 s. An

empty Al crucible was placed into the reference platform as the reference sample.

The test method used a heating and cooling test conditions. A temperature range of

heating to 290 oC and cooling to 0

oC was used. This method removed any thermal

history obtained via the compression moulding processes. A second heating and cooling

run was applied to record and analyse thermal events for material comparisons. Thermal

analysis was undertaken by incorporating a linear heating and cooling temperature

Page 97: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 3 Materials, Sample Preparation and Experimental Procedures

72

profile. TMDSC incorporates an oscillating time and temperature sinusoidal profile

superimposed onto the conventional linear heating ramp (Ramachandran 2002)

Thermal analysis commenced with decreasing the temperature of the sample to 0 °C then

ramp temperatures to 20 oC and kept isothermal for six minutes. An instantaneous

heating rate of 2 oC / minute with an underlying heating rate (β ) and sinusoidal

modulation period ( ΤA ) of +/- 0.60 oC every 40 seconds was applied from 20

oC to 290

oC. Once test specimen reached 290

oC, samples were kept isothermal for 2 minutes. A

temperature ramp of 2 oC / minute to 0

oC was applied to determine the cold

crystallisation temperature (Tcc) for each PET material. The test was performed twice, in

order to capture the material true thermal characteristics.

A second heating and cooling run were applied to analyse the materials temperature

melting peaks (Tm), glass transition (Tg) temperature at inflection point via reversing

specific heat (Rev Cp) and enthalpy of melting from total heat flow curves. Cold

crystallisation temperatures (Tcc) and enthalpy of cold crystallisation (ΔHcc) where taken

from the first and second heating run. The degree of crystallinity for each material was

taken from the first and second heating run. Heat of fusion for 100 percent crystalline

PET material is reported to require 135 J/g of energy (Bashir et al. 2000).

3.8. Mechanical characterisation Mechanical tests were undertaken to gain knowledge concerning the mechanical

properties for end use applications due to mechanical loading (Shah 1998). All data points

Page 98: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 3 Materials, Sample Preparation and Experimental Procedures

73

where used to establish the mechanical attributes for all materials used in the research

study. All results are discussed in chapter 7.1.

3.8.1. Injection Moulding Samples of all PET materials were injection moulded to produce tensile bars and impact

test piece specimens. Materials were dried for 6 hours within a desiccant dryer at elevated

temperatures of 160 oC before injection moulding. A TMC 80 ton injection moulding

machine was used to perform tensile bar moulding. The operating conditions used are

found in table 3.8.1-1

Table 3.8.1-1 Injection Moulding Operating Conditions

Mould Temperature °C 40 °C

Nozzle Temperature 300 °C

Barrel Zone 1 295 °C

Barrel Zone 2 295 °C

Barrel Zone 3 290 °C

Injection Time 3 seconds

Shot Size 55.00 mm

Page 99: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 3 Materials, Sample Preparation and Experimental Procedures

74

3.8.2. Izod Impact Test PET specimens were conditioned for 40 hours at 23 ± 2

oC and 50 ± 5 % relative

humidity in accordance with Australian Standard (AS) 1327 – 2001. A pendulum impact

test Coesfeild PSW utilising a 1 J hammer was used to carry out impact stress analysis.

Test parameters 1146.1 – 2001 was chosen to carry out impact testing applied to

specimen type 4. Calibration of the equipment was in accordance with AS 1146.3 to

determine the total energy loss due to friction. Impact velocity for the pendulum hammer

was within AS limits.

Notch type A was machined into each specimen. A minimum of ten specimen samples

were tested. This was to ensure the coefficient of variation of impact energy was less than

5 percent. Furthermore, an increase in population provided greater accuracy of the

materials impact properties. Samples where inspected according to preparation 6.3.5 of

AS 1146.1 – 2001. Each specimen was placed edgewise into the vice clamps following

the procedure outlined within AS 1146.1 – 2001. Results are discussed in chapter 7.1.1

3.8.3. Tensile Testing The tensile properties were conducted using an Instron Instruments 4500 Series machine.

Tensile tests were conducted on dumbell shaped specimens. A total number of 5 sample

specimens were used and marked according to type 1A test specimen as described in AS

1145.1 – 2001. All specimens were subjected to ambient conditioning for a period of 72

hours. Air temperature was recorded hourly for 8 hours to investigate the temperature

range. A temperature range from 21 to 23 oC was recorded. Relative Humidity was

recorded between 41 to 43 percent for the same corresponding period. Conditioning of

Page 100: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 3 Materials, Sample Preparation and Experimental Procedures

75

specimens was carried out following AS 1327.1 – 2001, procedure 7.1 b. Figure 3.8.3-1

shows a CAD schematic of each tensile bar used for tensile testing.

Figure 3.8.3-1Schematic of tensile bar used for all tensile testing

Test speed for each experimental setup was 50 mm/min. A maximum gauge length of

50mm was used for each test condition. An extensometer of 10 mm gauge length with 2

percent strain was used to calculate Young’s modulus (E) of each specimen.

3.8.4. Top Load Testing Top load tests were conducted using an Instron Instruments 4500 Series machine in

compression mode. ASTM D 2659 was used to analyse the critical top load performance

for each experimental plan. Tests were undertaken between two horizontal plates with

cross head speed of 10mm/min. A total of 5 test specimens were tested to obtained

average values. Top load results were measure in kN. Final results are discussed in

chapter 7.4.3.

3 mm

Page 101: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

76

4. Chapter 4: ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and

Bottle Characterisation

Page 102: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

77

4.1 ISBM Experimental Set-up To add value to the existing body of knowledge, substantial changes to the DoE model

were needed. Further knowledge considering the process mechanic used to improve

thermal stability was required to address the research questions. Further analysis into the

glass transition temperature (Tg) as a function of heat-set were required. The relationship

between the heat-set process and its influence on enthalpy changes to determine

percentage crystallinity was required. Inclusion of RPET and its effects on the mechanical

properties of a PET container needed to be analysed. Therefore, a heat-set temperature

range of 80 to 110 oC was chosen. Results to this research study are discussed in chapter 7

and in proceeding section.

PET beverage containers were manufactured using a single stage Aoki SB3 – 100 H –15

ISBM. Experiments were carried out incorporating a 375 ml conventional carbonated soft

drink (CSD) single cavity tool. The beverage container utilises a champagne base. Initial

setup of the process ensured a stable process condition via the manufacturing of SkyPET

BB7755 material. The Aoki ISBM was modified to record fluid temperature of the

bottom mould and the blow mould cavity. A temperature control unit with heating and

cooling function was used to maintain the heat-set temperature. The initial DoE model

incorporated a heat-set temperature range of 80 – 95 oC.

Analysis was undertaken to determine the final shrinkage (S2) results as a function of

draw ratio and preform surface temperature. Previous studies have found in the absence

of heat-setting, final shrinkage (S2) is determined by the draw ratio and strain rate

Page 103: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

78

(Maruhashi 2001). The 375 ml PET bottle configuration is discussed in section 4.4.

Shrinkage is also determined via the preform surface temperature. Final shrinkage (S2) is

further influenced by the temperature a beverage container comes into contact with a fluid

at elevated temperature during hot-filling process (Maruhashi et al. 1992b).

Thermocouples were used to measure the water outlet temperatures located close to the

blow mould cavity. Validation of the temperature control unit indicated a set-point

temperature of 95 oC maintained heat-set temperatures of 74

oC. The heat loss from the

temperature heating and cooling unit to the water outlet to the blow mould cavity was in

the order of 21 oC. A final temperature of 74

oC was not sufficient for heat-setting

necessary for improved dimensional stability of the PET container (Greener et al. 1999).

Incidentally, a heat-set temperature of 74 oC is below Tg values for all experimental

materials used.

TMDSC analysis was undertaken of the bottle panel section to validate the influence of

heat-set temperatures on the Tg value. The results from TMDSC confirmed the actual

heat-set temperatures of 74 oC – incorporating a set-point temperature of 95

oC – did not

change the Tg value of the material. Heat-set temperatures were required due to excessive

heat loss from the current heat-set system. Additional energy was required to increase the

heat-set temperature needed for this research study. This additional heat-set temperature

is required to increase the glass transition (Tg) temperature of the material, and enhance

morphological changes which yield improved dimensional stability of the container.

Page 104: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

79

Due to the initial validation process, a new temperature range was considered. Knowledge

concerning the influence of low heat-set temperatures affecting hot-fill shrinkage (S2) was

required. This knowledge would provide an understanding concerning the final hot-fill

shrinkage (S2) results influenced via strain induced crystallisation. The current evidence

indicates strain induced crystallisation can further enhance dimensional stability of a PET

container at elevated hot-fill temperatures.

The existing body of knowledge indicates hot-fill shrinkage S2 can be minimised with

low heat-set temperatures (Greener et al. 1999; Maruhashi et al. 1992a). The final

shrinkage remains low, regardless of the degree of draw ratio. Moreover, the influence of

preform surface temperatures and its influence on the final hot-fill shrinkage (S2) needed

to be investigated (Greener et al. 1999; Maruhashi et al. 1992a). Therefore, a thorough

knowledge of virgin - RPET blends and its influence via low heat-set temperatures and

its domination on dimensional stability at elevated temperatures was considered.

4.2. Heat-set Capabilities of ISBM Heater Cartridges of 240 Volts (V), 380 Watts (W) were used to heat the blow mould

cavity block. Equation 4.2-1 is used to determine the energy required to heat the

aluminium blow mould cavity block expressed as

TmCQ p Δ××=

Equation 4.2-1

Page 105: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

80

Where

Q = heat gained or lost (kJ)

pC = specific heat capacity (kJ/kg.oC)

m = mass (kg)

TΔ = temperature change (oC)

Mass of the Aluminium mould was calculated by multiplying the length (220mm), width

(100mm) and thickness (50mm). In turn, the mass was calculated to be 2.97 kg.

Furthermore, equation 4.2-1 was used to determine the energy required to heat the blow

mould cavity block from room temperature to a maximum of 150 oC. It was calculated

that an aluminium block from room temperature to 110 oC required 35 minutes of heat

soak time.

Figure 4.2-1 exhibits a schematic of the heater cartridge location in the existing mould.

380 Watts (W) heater cartridges using 240 Volts (V) power supply were used to heat the

mould block. Using equation 4.2-1, a temperature equilibration time of 35 minutes was

approximated with a starting temperature of 20 oC. A total of four heater cartridges of 8

mm diameter by 200 mm in length were placed into each mould block. J type

thermocouples where used with the thermocouples located in the heater cartridge. An on /

off temperature control unit was used to control separately each heating zone. Two

separate on – off temperature controllers were used to control temperatures to individual

heater cartridges. Confirmation of temperature to the mould was performed using a

Forward Looking Infrared (FLIR) thermal imaging camera and is discussed in the

proceeding chapter.

Page 106: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

81

Figure 4.2-1 Schematic of heater cartridge location with reference to the 375 ml blow

moulding cavity

Further experiments were conducted with improved heat-set capacity. Additional fine

tuning – adjustment to barrel and hot runner temperatures – to run a stable process was

accomplished. The manufacturing of quality PET bottles was paramount. An approach

was taken to manufacture PET beverage containers that would meet industry standards.

Experimental runs included SkyPET BB7755 material as the baseline material.

The process was considered optimum once quality bottles had been achieved without

defects or visual blemishes. Production trials included obtaining the maximum and

8mm

70 mm

Page 107: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

82

minimum preform temperatures to manufacture quality bottles. The preform cooling time

versus the preform surface temperature are discussed in chapter 7.3.1. During this

preliminary stage, a preform cooling time of 7 seconds resulted in pearlessence within the

side wall of the container. Refrigeration temperature was increased from 15 to 20 oC to

alleviate the problem. However this did not correct the quality issue of pearl essence

within the sidewall of the PET bottle, therefore preform cooling time was decreased to 6

seconds. The same methodology was applied to obtain quality bottles for minimum

preform cooling. The minimum cooling time was found to be 4.0 seconds. The process

was considered optimum once process conditions were stable. Table 4.2-1 lists the

process conditions used for all virgin DOE on the Aoki ISBM.

Table 4.2-1 Process conditions for bottle production to heat-set experimental runs manufactured via Aoki

Material Voridian CA12; SkyPet BB7755 100 % Virgin

Injection speed 200 mm/s Primary injection pressure 240 kgf/cm2

Secondary injection pressure 60 kgf/cm2

Injection time 0.77 s Injection cycle 18.5 s Screw diameter 38 mm Nozzle diameter 3 mm Screw rotation speed 110 rpm Primary blow pressure 5 kgf/cm2 Secondary blow pressure 20 kgf/cm2 Barrel temperature Set-point Actual Front 280 °C 286 °C Middle 280 °C 289 °C Rear 280 °C 281 °C Nozzle 290 °C 294 °C Hot runner temperature Sprue 285 °C 286 °C Block 280 °C 280 °C Nozzle 286 °C 287 °C Chiller temperature 20 °C 20 °C Oil temperature 35 – 45 °C 27 °C Material Drying Temperature 153 °C 153 °C Material Drying Time 5.5 hours

Page 108: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

83

Process condition for RPET blends for SkyPET BB7755 and Voridian CA 12 are shown

in tables 4.2-2 and 4.2-3 All PLC timing to Aoki ISBM are found in appendices A-1

Table 4.2-2. ISBM Process conditions for 60 % SkyPET BB7755 – 40 % RPET heat-set process.

Material SkyPet BB7755 60% Virgin 40 % RPET Injection speed 200 mm/s Primary injection pressure 240 kgf/cm2

Secondary injection pressure 60 kgf/cm2

Injection time 0.77 s Injection cycle 18.5 s Screw diameter 38 mm Nozzle diameter 3 mm Screw rotation speed 110 rpm Primary blow pressure 5 kgf/cm2 Secondary blow pressure 20 kgf/cm2 Barrel temperature Set-point Actual Front 280 °C 286 °C Middle 280 °C 289 °C Rear 285 °C 286 °C Nozzle 285 °C 290 °C Hot runner temperature Sprue 280 °C 281 °C Block 280 °C 280 °C Nozzle 280 °C 282 °C Chiller temperature 20 °C 20 °C Oil temperature 35 – 45 °C 27 °C Material Drying Temperature 153 °C 153 °C Material Drying Time 5.5 hours

Page 109: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

84

Table 4.2-3. ISBM Process conditions for 60 % Voridian CA12 – 40 % RPET heat-set process.

Material Voridian CA 12 60 % Virgin – 40 %RPET Injection speed 200 mm/s Primary injection pressure 240 kgf/cm2

Secondary injection pressure 60 kgf/cm2

Injection time 0.77 s Injection cycle 18.5 s Screw diameter 38 mm Nozzle diameter 3 mm Screw rotation speed 110 rpm Primary blow pressure 5 kgf/cm2 Secondary blow pressure 20 kgf/cm2 Barrel temperature Set-point Actual Front 280 °C 286 °C Middle 280 °C 289 °C Rear 280 °C 281 °C Nozzle 290 °C 294 °C Hot runner temperature Sprue 285 °C 286 °C Block 280 °C 280 °C Nozzle 286 °C 287 °C Chiller temperature 20 °C 20 °C Oil temperature 35 – 45 °C 27 °C Material Drying Temperature 153 °C 153 °C Material Drying Time 5.5 hours

4.2.1. Validation of Heat Set Mould Temperatures

Heat-set temperature validations were performed to ensure temperature stability during

ISBM production. Temperatures ranging from 120 – 150 oC were measured. These

temperatures were chosen in the event increased heat set temperatures were required as

part of this research.

As there were four separate temperatures control devices used for heat-set control, the left

front (LF) temperature controller was used to record and evaluate heat-set temperature. A

Page 110: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

85

cyclical low and high temperature band was observed for each set-point temperature. Data

was recorded to measure the upper and lower temperature range over a fifteen second

period.

A ThermaCAM PM595 Forward Looking Infrared Camera (FLIR) was used to validate

the heat-set temperature. The metal used is stainless steel. An emissivity value of 0.16 for

buffed stainless was used as reference by the FLIR literature. The distance between the

lens of the camera and the mould surface was recorded at 0.4 meters. An ambient

temperature of 22.0 oC was recorded with 57 percent relative humidity.

Figure 4.2.1 FLIR image of blow mould cavity face at set-point temperature of 150 oC

The validation process began from 120

oC, allowing for mould temperatures to equilibrate

to temperature over a ten minutes period. Observation was made recording the upper and

lower temperature limits. Temperature recording utilising the FLIR was use to recorded

Page 111: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

86

data for one minute duration. Five sample measurements (temperature) were recorded and

analysed in Microsoft Excel.

Figure 4.2.1 shows a thermal image for temperature location measurements. A total of

three spot positions were used. Position SP02 was used to record temperature, as this

position referred to the panel section of the PET container. Although the temperature was

not the mould cavity surface, it still provides an insight into the stability of heat-set

temperature after modifications. Table 4.2.1 lists a summary of results observed for each

heat-set temperature.

Table 4.2.1 Temperature recordings from FLIR for each temperature set for Heat Set applications

Actual Temperature (oC) 120 130 140 150

1min 125 130 138 147

2 min 126 132 137 146

3 min 127 133 138 146

4 min 126 133 137 147

5 min 125 133 139 148

In figure 4.2.1-1 a linear regression line is fitted to the data. The data presented an

excellent fit between set-points and the actual temperatures. These heat-set modifications

yielded improved control of temperature for this research study. This validation process

enhanced the scope for increased heat-set analysis.

Page 112: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

87

R2 = 0.9935

120.00

125.00

130.00

135.00

140.00

145.00

150.00

120 130 140 150Set-point Temperature (oC)

Actu

al T

empe

ratu

re (o C

)

Figure 4.2.1-1 Set-point temperature versus actual mould temperature to validate of electrical heater cartridge installation for heat set temperature control

4.3. ISBM Bottle Production Set-up

4.3.1. Heat-set Bottle Production The heat-set DoE was conducted using a 375 ml panel-less, ribless beverage container. A

single stage Aoki SB3 – 100H –15 (see figure 4.3-1) single cavity tool was used to

conduct all PET bottle trials. ISBM machine was given one hour for heat soak.

Temperature equilibration of the blow mould tools from ambient temperature took 35

minutes to reach the set-point temperature.

Page 113: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

88

Figure 4.3.1 Single Stage Aoki SB3 – 100H –15 single cavity tool

Table 4.3.1 below lists the PET materials and RPET blends DoE. Due to PET

hydroscopic nature, the production methodology used was to manufacture one grade at a

time. Bottle production was based on virgin grade materials first, and then 60 percent and

40 percent blends until all DoE were completed.

Page 114: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

89

Table 4.3.1 DOE Experimental Run for ISBM PET Bottle Manufacture

Trial # Material Grade Virgin RPET

Exp # 1 CA12 0.6 0.4

Exp # 2 CA12 0.6 0.4

Exp # 3 BB7755 0.6 0.4

Exp # 4 BB7755 0.6 0.4

Exp # 5 BB7755 0.6 0.4

Exp # 6 BB7755 1 0

Exp # 7 CA12 1 0

Exp # 8 CA12 1 0

Exp # 9 CA12 1 0

Exp # 10 BB7755 1 0

Exp # 11 CA12 0.8 0.2

Exp # 12 CA12 0.6 0.4

Exp # 13 BB7755 0.733 0.267

Exp # 14 CA12 1 0

Exp # 15 BB7755 1 0

Exp # 16 CA12 0.6 0.4

Exp # 17 CA12 0.6 0.4

Exp # 18 BB7755 1 0

Exp # 19 BB7755 0.8 0.2

Exp # 20 BB7755 1 0

Exp # 21 CA12 0.8 0.2

Increasing the density of the crystallite, whist annealing in the amorphous region during

heat-set, effectively locks in orientation during the heat set process (Tekkanat. 2000).

Controlled spherulitic sites occur, whilst improving the amorphous density of the

polymer, hence improving the thermal stability of the PET container (Caldicott 1998)

As the morphology of PET in its amorphous phase is coil like in structure (Rosato 1989),

the heat-set process is applied to increase the Tg. The results is to increase the density and

Page 115: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

90

size of the crystallite, hence control spherulitic size within the side walls of the PET

container (Tekkanat 2000). This allows nucleation with the inclusion of RPET and

growth of high temperature stable crystal sites within the amorphous phase. Of particular

interest is to increase the nucleation and crystal growth within the sidewall of a PET

container.

4.3.2. Infrared Camera Set-up The temperature of the PET surface preform was recorded by a ThermaCAM PM595

Forward Looking Infrared Camera (FLIR). The emissivity value was determined

measuring a single point temperature within a heated preform. The emissivity of the IR

camera was then altered until good temperature agreement was made between the single

point temperature via a hand held thermocouple and the IR camera. The ambient

temperature and relative humidity was recorded using a thermo-hygrometer Testo 610

relative humidity and temperature control device. The distance between the preform and

the FLIR was measured between the lens of the FLIR and the preform

During the manufacturing process, the ThermaCAM TM Infrared (IR) camera incorporated

a built-in 24 o optical lens to measure preform surface temperatures for each DoE. At the

conclusion of each experimental run, the preform surface temperature was recorded.

Three reference points were recorded. The recording of preform surface temperatures is

important as studies have demonstrated a reduction of process (S1) and hot-fill (S2)

shrinkage with increased preform surface temperatures (Nakamura 1989).

Page 116: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

91

As can be seen from figure 4.3.2, temperature measurements were taken from locations

SP01, SP02 and SP03. Location point for SP01 is closest to the lip cavity, whereas SP03

is located at the base of preform. Base temperature is important as it limits the speed of

production and influences final part quality. A temperature schematic is presented for

temperature location identification.

14.0°C

123.7°C

20

40

60

80

100

120SP01

SP02

SP03

Figure 4.3.2 A sample preform thermograph indicating X and Y axis

All temperature measurements were taken from the same location in order to ensure

accuracy and precision. The distance from the IR lens to the preform was 0.40 meters.

The camera was placed on a tripod to ensure stability during each experiment.

Table 4.3.2-1 Example of IR Spot Temperature Location

Experimental Number

Perform Temp Spot 1

oC

Perform Temp Spot 2

oC

Perform Temp Spot 3

oC

Axis x1

(mm)

Axis x2

(mm)

Axis x3

(mm)

Axis y1

(mm)

Axis y2

(mm)

Axis y3

(mm)

Exp # 11 121.8 114.5 101.9 165.00

165.00

165.00 32.00 74.00 115.0

0

X

Y

Preform

Die Lip C

Page 117: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

92

4.4. Carbonated Soft Drink Bottle Configuration (CSD)

A 375 ml carbonated soft drink bottle with champagne base was used in all heat-set and

hot-fill experiment. The weight of the preform is 19.5 grams (g). The dimensions of this

container are shown in figure 4.4-1. The following dimensions are found in the blow

moulding tool drawing supplied from Aoki.

Preform diameter (D2) = 17 ± 1 mm

CSD Bottle Diameter (D1) = 64 ± 2 mm,

CSD axial bottle length (L1) = 142 ± 1 mm

Preform Axial Length (L2) = 54 ± 1 mm.

The hoop ratio (Hr) is can be expressed as 2

1

DDHr =

= 3.77

Equation 4.4-1

The axial ratio (Ar) is can be expressed as 2

1

LLAr =

= 2.63

Equation 4.4-2

The blow up Ratio (BUR) = rr AH ×

= 9.92

Equation 4.4-3

Page 118: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

93

Figure 4.4-1 Schematic of 375 ml panel-less, ribless PET container used for ISBM bottle

production and Hot fill experiments.

4.5. Sample Selection for Analysis During each experimental run, 30 PET bottles were labelled and placed into plastic bags,

then sealed. A total of 5 test specimens were used for each test. Analytical testing of each

sample included volumetric (S1) and hot-fill (S2) test, top-load (TL) test, burst strength

(BS) test and wall thickness measurements. Bottles were labelled in sequence of

manufacture.

Page 119: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

94

4.6. Thermal Stability at Elevated Temperature

Characterisation

4.6.1. Volume Capacity Determination All PET beverage containers were weighed to record each container’s volume capacity.

Each container was conditioned for one week. As PET is a semi crystalline material, most

of its shrinkage takes place between twenty four to forty eight hours. Time was given for

each container to shrink within the given time period. All bottles were filled at 21 oC with

tepid water. An electronic scale was used to record each beverage containers weight. The

final process shrinkage (S1) is determined via equation 4.6.1-1

1000

101 ×

−=

VVVS

Equation 4.6.1-1

Where

1S = Process Shrinkage

0V = Volume of 375 ml CSD PET container to meniscus level

1V = Volume of heat-set beverage container

Page 120: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

95

4.6.2. Hot-fill Procedure The hot-fill method used implemented current industry hot-fill practices (Tekkanat 2000).

An 8 litre capacity urn was used. The urn had temperature tolerance of ± 1 oC. The

temperature was set to 85 oC. Crown seals measuring 28 mm were used to seal each PET

container. The each crown seal was applied by utilising a manual crown seal closure

device.

Tepid water was used to fill the urn to 8 litre capacity. Once the water reached 85 oC, a

further 30 minutes was given to ensure that the water temperature reached equilibration.

A manual thermometer was used to confirm water temperature had reached the set-point

temperature.

Each bottle was filled until heated water reached the undercut (u) level of the CSD bottle.

This is approximately 16 mm from the top of the seal bottle surface (H) as shown in

4.6.2-1. It is important to note that initial shrinkage takes places during this time. Speed in

placing the crown seal on each beverage container and sealing the neck surface is

imperative. Upon completion, the PET container was allowed to stand on its base for a

duration of 60 sec. The beverage container was laid on its side for 5 minutes. After 300

seconds, the beverage container was immersed in a cold water bath.

Page 121: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

96

Figure 4.6.2-1 Standard code letters reference to neck dimension for 375 ml CSD beverage container

The temperature of the bath is approximately 23

oC. After 24 hours, the crown seal is

removed and water is filled to the meniscus level. The weight of the PET container is

recorded and results used to calculate the hot-fill shrinkage (S2). Industry expectation for

shrinkage varies depending on the cooling technology used for cooling during the bottle

production stage. Process shrinkage (S1) should be no greater than one percent, whereas

hot-fill (S2) shrinkage is to be no greater than two percent by volume (Tekkanat. 2000).

Hot-fill shrinkage (S2) results were calculated via equation 4.6.2-1

1001

212 ×

−=

VVVS

Equation 4.6.2-1

Where

2S = Hot-fill shrinkage

1V = Volume of 375 ml CSD PET container to meniscus level

Page 122: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

97

2V = Volume of the hot-fill beverage container

4.7. Burst Strength Test Burst strength tests were conducted using a TopWave BR3000. Each test was conducted

168 hours after ISBM manufacture of PET beverage container. All test specimens were

set to fill a nominal value of 376 ml. Each PET container was filled to the nominal value,

pressurised by use of Nitrogen (N) gas injected into each container. The Burst tester

records the expanded volume, test time, percentage expansion and pressure. Once the

bottle failed, the data was sent to a stand alone personal computer to record each result.

Table 4.7-1 lists an example of the data record for each test.

Table 4.7-1 Sample Burst Test results

Exp # 21 Bottle # Nominal Volume

(ml)

Expanded Volume (ml)

Expansion (%)

Pressure (KPa)

Test Time (s)

Burst Result

21 Bst 1 376 283 75.2 1300 2 yes

21 Bst 2 376 243 64.7 1260 2 yes

21 Bst 3 376 219 58.4 1240 2 yes

21 Bst 4 376 316 84.2 1330 3 yes

21 Bst 5 376 290 77.2 1330 2 yes

4.8. Wall Thickness Measurement Procedure The wall thickness measurements were recorded using a Magna Mike magnetic thickness

instrument. One test sample was taken for each DoE experimental set. Drawing with

Autocad version 14, a 80 mm diameter circle was drawn and sectioned into 60 mm. The

circle was sectioned into 1/6 sections. This was then printed on white paper. The PET

Page 123: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

98

bottle was placed in the centre of the 80 mm Ø circumference printed paper. Looking

from the top of the bottle, the reflection of each reference point – that is the 1/6 sections

reflected onto the bottle surface. Figure 4.8-1 indicates each location in relation to each

PET container axial length.

Figure 4.8-1 Wall thickness bottle location along axial length and circumference of PET beverage container

With the use of a digital height gauge, each reference point was place in regards to the

bottles height. A total of 6 reference points along the axial length and six around the

circumference of each PET container where included. The measurement along the axial

direction was 5, 14, 46, 87, 95 and 120 mm. Figure 4.8-1 demonstrates reference point

location to the 375 ml PET beverage container.

Point 1

Point 2

Point 3

Point 6

Point 5

Point 3

80 mm

Page 124: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

99

Measurements 5 – 125 mm were marked perpendicular to the bottle. This ensures straight

lines and accurate reproduction of bottle markings for each experimental set. Table 4.8-1

provides an example of each reference point around the bottles circumference in relations

to the bottles height.

Table 4.8-1 A sample measurement positions for wall thickness location

Exp #

11 Measurement

Base Radius

5mm

Panel Base 14

mm

Panel Middle

46 mm

Panel Top

87 mm

Shoulder

Bottom 95

mm

Shoulder

Middle

120 mm

Point # 1 0.423 0.358 0.288 0.283 0.302 0.394

Point # 2 0.391 0.326 0.293 0.293 0.299 0.364

Point # 3 0.36 0.319 0.287 0.277 0.295 0.374

Point # 4 0.407 0.33 0.29 0.279 0.293 0.366

Point # 5 0.553 0.38 0.313 0.295 0.311 0.403

Point # 6 0.536 0.371 0.296 0.304 0.312 0.407

4.9. Mechanical Characterisation

4.9.1. Top Load Procedure Top load test were conducted utilising an Instron 4466 tensile tester. Each bottle was

placed between two horizontal plates. The tensile tester had been set to compression

mode. Each test required wall thickness average measurements, height of PET containers

and diameter average for each beverage container. A cross head speed of 10 mm / minute

was used recording 10 point per second. The results were transferred and analysed using

Instron Series IX software. Figure 4.9.1-1 demonstrates an example top load result plotted

with Microsoft Excel 2003.

Page 125: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

100

Figure 4.9.1-1 A sample graph for top – load test results

4.9.2. Tensile test panel section Tensile tests were conducted on an Instron 5560 Series with analysis undertaken on

Instron Bluehill 2 software. Test specimens length of 70 mm and a width of 18 mm from

the PET container panel were prepared. A length of seventy mm was chosen as this

provided a flat parallel section which did not include the radius section of the bottle. A

gauge length of 30 mm was used due to grip used. Figure 4.9.2-1 demonstrates the panel

location in reference to the PET beverage container.

This investigation sought to determine the Youngs Modulus (E) value for PET bottles

manufactured via optimised heat-set DoE described in chapter 5.8.3. A cross head speed

of 10 mm / minute was used recording 10 point per second. Results were processed with

Instron Bluehill 2 software, and analysis validated utilising Microsoft Excel 2003.

Yield Point

Page 126: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

101

Figure 4.9.2-1 Tensile Tests panel section taken from PET beverage container panel

4.10. Density measurement spot panel procedure Density measurements for optimised DoE PET beverage container was preformed

according to ASTM 792 test method B. Samples were taken at 46 mm in the axial

direction of the panel section. Sample preparation was performed in ambient conditions

of 23 oC for a minimum of 40 hours. A scale measuring 0.1mg accuracy was used. A

methanol solvent solution with a measured density of 0.79148 g/cm3 is recorded at 23 oC.

A section of 20mm × 20 mm was cut from the panel. This was weighed is air and

measurements recorded. The sample piece was cut into approximately 1mm × 1mm

dimensions and placed into a sinker basket which was then submerged in the methanol

solution. PET samples were kept in methanol solution for three minutes. Weights of PET

18 mm

30mm 70mm

Page 127: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

102

samples in methanol solutions were recorded and density measurements calculated.

Figure 4.10-1 demonstrates the localised area cut out for density measurements

Figure 4.10-1 Panel section cut out for all density measurements from localised area.

4.11. Density measurement panel section procedure Density measurement experiments were conducted as presented in section 4.10. An

alternative procedure was performed in which the whole panel section was sectioned out

and cut into approximately 1mm square sections. Cut samples where placed into the

sinker basket, allowing equilibration time of three minutes. Sample weights in solution

were recorded and density measurements extracted. Figure 4.11-1 provides a schematic

demonstrating the cut out section to the PET beverage panel. A discussion of the results is

presented in chapter 7. 8.

20m

20m

Page 128: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 4 ISBM Experimental Set-up Procedure and Bottle Characterisation

103

.

Figure 4.11-1 Panel section cut out for all density measurements from entire panel section.

Page 129: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

104

5. Chapter 5: Design of Experiment

Page 130: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

105

5.1. Introduction The DoE is used to evaluate and quantify areas of variation from within the ISBM

process (Rauwendaal 2000). Knowledge concerning process variables and its direct

influence in maintaining a stable ISBM process provides clarity when constructing a

DoE. Areas assisting in the construction of the projects DoE included:-

• Define areas that affect part quality

• Determine design variables and their relationship with response variables

• Reduce possible variations which can harm response variables results

• Establish minimum tolerances needed to prevent non-conforming beverage

container.

The DoE software used was Echip Version 7. The use of Echip provides guidance in

developing an experimental model. Results obtained via the DoE demonstrate statistical

significant results via the established model terms. As discussed in chapter 3, the design

variables were chosen which directly influenced the heat-set process and the final

shrinkage of a PET beverage container (Caldicott 1998). Design variables are considered

as process conditions that can be controlled from the process (Wheeler et al. 2002a). An

example can include blow time or preform cooling time.

Echip is a DoE tool, allowing the user to determine whether the number of trails required

is to large or small when considering the standard deviation for each design variable

(Wheeler et al. 2002b) . This particular DoE allows the construction of contour plots and

the construction of optimised and predictive process model plots. Furthermore, Echip is

Page 131: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

106

able to report on multiple optimised response models for the ISBM process, whilst

constraining certain response and design variables (Betsch 2000). It provides clarity in

determining whether the fields of interest are too small or too large for analysis.

Echip allows the user to examine each field of interest and include targeted standard

deviation (SD) for each response variable. This provided a measure of success or failure

utilising the DoE model terms expressed before experiments are conducted. This is an

important part to the DoE process. Echip calculates the number of trials based on the

recorded information. Determining the total trials necessary for each response variable is

crucial. This particular validation methodology allows separate examination of each

design and response variable.

5.2. Design of Experiment Echip software calculated 21 unique trials with 5 repeats. As part of this preliminary

stage, a G efficiency value of one is set as default by Echip. A final G efficiency value of

0.452 was calculated after DoE design. The G efficiency value is used by Echip to

establish the standard deviation of an optimal design and the maximum variance for a

given design (Wheeler et al. 2002a). EchipDoE software suggests a G efficiency value of

0.50 for optimal analysis. Based on the calculated G efficiency value and the inclusion of

5 repeats, the design was considered to provide practicable statistical results. A standard

deviation (SD) of 0.5 was factored for each response variable.

Randomisation is an important feature of the DoE as it can minimise experimental error

due to ambient conditions. Although randomisation of trial order is suggested by the DoE,

Page 132: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

107

due to the hydroscopic nature of PET, which requires drying prior to processing, trial

randomisation is not practical. This would extended the number of days required to

conducted ISBM experiments beyond the time available to complete this research.

An algorithmic continuous quadratic design model was chosen for the DoE. A total of 5

design variables and 3 response variables were chosen. Continuous, mixture and block

variable types were set to specific design variables as part of the DoE. Table 5.2-1 lists

the original DoE for the ISBM process.

Table 5.2-1 Initial DoE for heat-set ISBM Process

Experimental Trial #

Tmould (oC)

Blowing time (s)

Preform Cooling Time (s) PET Grade Virgin % RPET %

Exp # 1 80 3 4 CA12 0.6 0.4 Exp # 2 80 7 6 CA12 0.6 0.4 Exp # 3 110 3 5 BB7755 0.6 0.4 Exp # 4 110 5 4 BB7755 0.6 0.4 Exp # 5 80 3 6 BB7755 0.6 0.4 Exp # 6 80 7 4 BB7755 1 0 Exp # 7 110 7 4 CA12 1 0 Exp # 8 80 7 6 CA12 1 0 Exp # 9 80 3 4 CA12 1 0 Exp # 10 110 3 6 BB7755 1 0 Exp # 11 110 3 4 CA12 0.8 0.2 Exp # 12 80 7 4 CA12 0.6 0.4 Exp # 13 110 7 6 BB7755 0.733 0.267 Exp # 14 80 3 6 CA12 1 0 Exp # 15 95 3 4 BB7755 1 0 Exp # 16 95 7 5 CA12 0.6 0.4 Exp # 17 110 5 6 CA12 0.6 0.4

Exp # 18 95 7 6 BB7755 1 0 Exp # 19 80 5 5 BB7755 0.8 0.2 Exp # 20 110 5 5 BB7755 1 0 Exp # 21 95 5 5 CA12 0.8 0.2 Exp # 1 Repeat 80 3 4 CA12 0.6 0.4 Exp # 2 Repeat 80 7 6 CA12 0.6 0.4 Exp # 3 Repeat 110 3 5 BB7755 0.6 0.4 Exp # 4 Repeat 110 5 4 BB7755 0.6 0.4 Exp # 5 Repeat 80 3 6 BB7755 0.6 0.4

Page 133: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

108

A 2-D surface response model graphing both design and response variables were plotted

within Echip. Burst strength test, top load test, process shrinkage (S1) and hot-fill

shrinkage (S2) data points were analysed using Microsoft Excel 2003. Mean and standard

deviation results were recorded for each experimental run. Calculated mean results were

placed into Echip software for analysis. All response variable data points were collated

and a results summary table plotted, establishing the relationship between response and

design variables. Further discussion concerning the result summary table are presented in

section 5.3 and 5.6

5.3. Contour 1-D Plots Contour 1-D plots were constructed demonstrating relationships between response and

design variables. This is a quick and easy way for determining a design variables

influence on response variable properties. Analysis of hot-fill shrinkage (S2) and mould

temperature (heat-set temperature) via 1-D plot was undertaken. Figure 5.3-1

demonstrates a contour 1-D graph for hot-fill shrinkage (S2) and mould temperature.

Page 134: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

109

Figure 5.3-1 Contour 1-D plot for hot-fill shrinkage against mould temperature

Improvements in S2 by way of one control variable – in this case heat-set (blow mould)

temperatures – is predicted via the DoE. Preform cooling of 5 s and blow time of 5 s is

predicted. The 1-D contour plot predicts process conditions and material blend based on

design and response variables located in figure 5.3-1. A material blend, – Voridian CA 12

as suggested as material order 1 consisting of 51.6 percent and Visy RPET 48.4 percent is

predicted in the DoE.

However the predicted hot-fill shrinkage (S2) upper and lower limits are excessive within

the DoE model. Manufacturing beverage containers via the predicted model will observe

results to fall between the upper and lower limits, rendering difficulty in predicting

acceptable S2 results.

Preform Cooling Tim = 5.0(s)

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

80 85 90 95 100 105 110

Mould Temperature

Hot-fill and Mould Temperature

Limits Mould Temperature

Blow Time = 5.0 (s)

Material = 0.516 %Recycled = 0.484 %Material Order =

S2 %

Page 135: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

110

Contour 1-D plots for (S2) obtained via the initial DoE included separate graphs for hot-

fill (S2) shrinkage versus blow time and preform cooling time presented in figures 5.3-2

and figure 5.3-3. The following plots indicate similar trends in upper and lower limits

observed in figure 5.3-1. The remaining 1-D contour plots via initial DoE are presented in

appendices C 1 – 9.

Figure 5.3-2 Contour 1-D plots from Initial DoE for hot-fill and blow time

LimitsDuration

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0

Blow time

Hot-fill shrinkage (S2)

Mould Temperature = 95.0 OCPreform Cooling Tim = 5.0 OCMaterial = 0.516 Recycled = 0.484 Material Order = 1

S2%

Page 136: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

111

EC

HIP

10

20

30

40

50

4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0

Preform Cooling Tim

Hot-fill Shrinkage

LimitsPreform Cooling Tim

MouldTemperature = 95.0Duration = 5.0Material = 0.516Recycled = 0.484Material Order = 1

Figure 5.3-3 Contour 1-D plots from Initial DoE for hot-fill versus preform cooling time

Table 5.3-1 demonstrates a result summary table to all response and design variables.

Variables include top load (TLS), burst strength (BS), process shrinkage (S1), hot-fill

shrinkage (S2) and absolute shrinkage (St). Burst strength results demonstrate a

statistically significant for preform cooling time with alpha (α ) equal to 0.006. A

statistical significance represented as alpha (α ) totalling 0.0025 for virgin material and

virgin - RPET blends is observed.

Process shrinkage (S1) recorded a statistical significant result (α ) totalling 0.0015 for

preform cooling time. Hot-fill shrinkage (S2) shrinkage (α ) result of 0.0024 demonstrate

a statistical significance also with preform cooling time. The results summary table

presented in table 5.3-1 indicates no statistical significance for response variables when

plotted against heat-set temperature (mould temperature) and blow time. The level of

statistical significance is shown by a star rating system. A 3 star (***) rating means

oC (s)

e

Page 137: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

112

significance at a 0.01 % level. The representation of 1 star (*) and two star (**)

demonstrates statistical significance at 5% and 1% levels respectively.

Table 5.3-1 Results summary table for initial DoE using Quadratic Model

Absolute shrinkage (St) (α ) results of 0.0241 is observed for preform cooling time from

the existing DoE model, demonstrating a significant relationship with preform cooling

time. SkyPET BB7755 PET represented as material order 2 in the DoE model reveal a

statistical significance (α ) for (S2) of 0.0280 and (St) of 0.0165. No other terms within

the results summary table indicate further statistical significance.

e

Page 138: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

113

5.3.1. Pareto Effects to Initial DoE Pareto effects chart were assessed to seek the model term with the greatest influence on

process variables. The DoE software separates the process variable from highest to lowest

in order of magnitude. The software represents each influence by placing a (+) sign

indicating a positive response and (–) sign indicating a negative influence. The effects

having the greatest statistical significance is located in the top right of the graph (Wheeler

et al. 2002a). The colour to each effects bar indicates the importance of the effect to the

DoE model. From the graph, the effects marked in red were discarded, the effects in blue

were deemed to be significant with a 95 percent confidence to the respective effect.

Figure 5.3.1-1 shows the Pareto effects chart for hot-fill shrinkage against process design

variables.

Page 139: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

114

Figure 5.3.1-1 Pareto effects chart for hot-fill shrinkage

Preform cooling time and material order (2) – that is SkyPET BB7755 – is deemed to

influence dimensional stability of the PET beverage container. Effects in red including

recycled^2 and material^2, duration^2, duration preform cooling time and duration

(blow time) material were eliminated. The remaining terms in grey are undecided

terms within the DoE software (Wheeler et al. 2002a). The Pareto effects chart for

process shrinkage (S1), absolute shrinkage (St), burst strength and Top load strength are

presented in appendices figure 5.3.1-2, figure 5.3.1-3, figure 5.3.1-4 and figure 5.3.1-5. In

figure 5.3.1-2, figure 5.3.1-3, Pareto effects charts, the DoE model was unable to resolve

many terms, as marked undecided terms (grey lines). Figure 5.3.1-4 and figure 5.3.1-5

show for burst strength and top load strength many more decided terms, however the DoE

Term

0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.300.350.40 0.45 0.500.55 0.60

Effect

Pareto Effects for Hot-Fill Shrinkage

3 Preform Cooling Tim +

14 Preform Cooling Tim*Recycled -

20 Recycled^2+

21 Material Order [2] -

19 Material^2+

9 Mould Temperature*Recycled +

13 Preform Cooling Tim*Material +

8 Mould Temperature*Material -

17 Duration^2-

10 Duration*Preform Cooling Tim -

12 Duration*Recycled -

11 Duration*Material +

5 Recycled-

4 Material+

Page 140: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

115

model considers many terms as negative effects (marked as red lines) for these response

variables.

Figure 5.3.1-2 Pareto affects charts for Process Shrinkage (S1).

Figure 5.3.1-3 Pareto affects charts from initial DoE for Absolute Shrinkage (St)

Term

0.00 0.050.10 0.15 0.20 0.250.30 0.350.400.45 0.50

Effect

Pareto Effects for Process Shrinkage

3 Preform Cooling Time +

14 Preform Cooling Tim*Recycled - 13 Preform Cooling Tim*Material +

17 Duration^2- 18 Preform Cooling Tim^2 +

20 Recycled^2- 19 Material^2-

2 Duration-

1 Mould Temperature+

6 Mould Temperature*Duration - 7 Mould Temperature*Preform Cooling Time+

5 Recycled- 4 Material+ 15 Material*Recycled+

ECHIP

Term

0.0 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 2.8 3.2 3.6 4.0 4.4 4.8

Effect

Pareto Effects for Absolute Shrinkage

3 Preform Cooling Time+

20 Recycled^2+ 19 Material^2+

9 Mould Temperature*Recycled + 8 Mould Temperature*Material - 21 Material Order[2]- 12 Duration*Recycled- 7 Mould Temperature*Preform Cooling Time - 1 Mould Temperature- 11 Duration*Material+

18 Preform Cooling Tim^2 -

5 Recycled- 17 Duration^2- 15 Material*Recycled-

Page 141: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

116

Figure 5.3.1-4 Pareto affects charts from initial DoE for Burst Test (BS)

Figure 5.3.1-5 Pareto affects charts from initial DoE for Top-load (TLS)

ECHIP

Term

0 50 100 150200 250 300 350 400450500550600650700

Effect

Pareto Effects for Burst test

3 Preform Cooling Time+ 20 Recycled^2+ 19 Material^2+ 18 Preform Cooling Tim^2- 5 Recycled- 4 Material+ 17 Duration^2-

7 Mould Temperature*Preform Cooling Time + 12 Duration*Recycled- 1 Mould Temperature- 15 Material*Recycled- 11 Duration*Material+ 16 MouldTemperature^2+ 6 Mould Temperature*Duration +

Term

0.00 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09

Effect

Pareto Effects for Top-load

14 Preform Cooling Tim*Recycled + 13 Preform Cooling Tim*Material - 3 Preform Cooling Tim- 7 Mould Temperature*Preform Cooling Tim -

20 Recycled^2-

10 Duration*Preform Cooling Tim+

19 Material^2- 9 Mould Temperature*Recycled + 8 Mould Temperature*Material - 1 Mould Temperature+ 21 Material Order[2]+ 18 Preform Cooling Tim^2- 15 Material*Recycled+ 12 Duration*Recycled-

Page 142: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

117

The number of undecided and removable terms used by Echip exceeded our expectation.

Undecided terms are suggested based on the Scot’s verdict; blue lines indicating 95 %

confidence level, red terms indicating terms to not demonstrate 95 % confidence level to

be eliminated and grey lines indicated as undecided terms (Wheeler et al. 2002a). This

made it extremely difficult to determine with certainty design variables having a 95 %

statistical significance over response variables.

5.4. Contour 2-D plots Additional plots were constructed based on response variables listed in results summary

table 5.3-1. Single contour 2-D plots of S2 against preform cooling time and blow time

were constructed. The DoE software indicated the constructed plot to be “Outside

Design” as demonstrated in figure 5.4-1. Plots constructed by Echip use a convex hull,

indicating the experimental region to the 2D plots of interest. In this case, an Outside

Design indicates the Echip DoE data is outside the experimental region (Wheeler et al.

2002a). Therefore, the maximum value for S2 is located outside the design boundary

Page 143: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

118

Figure 5.4-1 Outside design Contour 2-D plot for hot-fill shrinkage and Mould temperature

Figure 5.4-2 Hot-fill shrinkage optimised 2-D Contour plot post outside design

Preform Cooling Time

Material Order = 2

Preform Cooling Time

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

Mould Temp (OC)

4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0

Hot-fill Shrinkage (S2) % 2D Plot

7.2

10.4

Duration = 5.0 (s)Material = 0.516 Recycled = 0.484 Material Order = 1

Outside Design

Mould Temperature

(oC)

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0

Hot-fill Shrinkage (S2) % 2D Plot

3.1 3.9 5.6 7.0

Duration = 3.0 (s)

Material = 0.920

Recycled = 0.080

Page 144: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

119

Optimisation method utilised a grid search function to the contour plot, minimising S2.

This function is best used for DoE models including categorical variables (Wheeler et al.

2002b). Optimisation functions for process shrinkage (S1) were also carried out.

Optimised 2- D contour plots for preform cooling and moulding temperature indicated an

outside design. Figure 5.4-2 lists final optimised prediction.

Single 2-D contour plots for S1, preform cooling time and blow time were constructed.

Process shrinkage (S1) demonstrates similar results observed in figure 5.4-2. The Outside

Design was removed during optimised process shrinkage (S1). The results for contour 2-D

plot are demonstrated in figure 5.4-3.

Figure 5.4-3 Outside design Contour 2-D plot for process shrinkage and preform cooling

time.

Outside Design

0.38

Process Shrinkage (S1)

Preform Cooling Time

Mould Temperature

(oC)

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0

0.20 0.20

Blow Time = 5.0 (s) Material = 0.516 Recycled = 0.484Material Order = 1

Page 145: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

120

Figure 5.4-4 Process shrinkage optimised 2-D Contour plot post outside design

Optimised contour 2-D plots (figure 5.4-2) indicates a heat-set temperature of 110

oC,

with a material blend of ninety-two percent SkyPET BB7755 - eight percent RPET blend.

This contour plot suggests increasing preform temperature due to a decrease in preform

cooling time (4 s). A decrease in blow time duration (3 s) is further suggested.

The DoE indicated a high number of undecided and removed terms as presented in tables

5.3.1-1 to 5.3.1-5. Further information was required to better understand dimensional

stability of a PET beverage container for hot-fill applications. Due to the lack of

undecided terms found within the DoE, it was clear the original aims of the project had

not been met. The initial DoE did not demonstrate a statistical significance for heat-set

temperature and its influence on minimising S2 as a function of blow time and RPET

inclusion. As outside designs are present, augmentation of the DoE is required to improve

Duration

3.0

3.5

4.0

4.5

5.0

5.5

6.0

6.5

7.0

80 85 90 95 100 105 110

Mould Temperature

Process Shrinkage (S1)

0.08

0.14

0.14

0.18

0.18

0.22

0.22

0.26

Material = 0.600 Recycled = 0.400 Material Order = 2

Low Limit High Limit 0.049 -0.422 0.520

MouldTem=110.00 Duration=7.00 Value Low Limit High Limit

0.520

Mould Temp=110.00(oC) Duration=7.00

Preform Cooling Tim = 4.6 (s)

0.049 -0.422

Page 146: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

121

the DoE resolution. The need to establish a trend if any concerning S2 with increased

heat-set temperature was required. Improved results concerning statistical significance

were necessary to improve our knowledge and address the research questions.

Therefore, an extension to the current DoE was carried out via an augmentation

procedure. Echip DoE allows the users to extend the original DoE, keeping the existing

data obtained to date without the need to develop a new DoE. Using the augmentation

procedure within Echip, an increase in the number of repeats were entered. A focus in

increasing the G efficiency value was targeted, improving the statistical resolution.

Incorporating the initial DoE data, the number of trial function within Echip was used to

determine the number of unique trials for augmented DoE. Augmentation was carried out

using a quadratic DoE model.

Table 5.4-1 presents the augmented quadratic model including standard deviation and

least important difference. The table includes the number of unique trials without repeats

with the recorded G efficiency value for each response variable. An increase in the G

efficiency value is demonstrated, improving the DoE resolutions. Concluding the

augmented process, the number of unique trials increased from 21 to 25, including 5

repeat sets. The G efficiency value rose from 45 to 71.

Table 5.4-1 How many trial summary table from Augmented Quadratic Model with increase G Efficiency Value

Response Variables SD Least Important Difference

Number of Trials

G Efficiency

Hot fill Shrinkage 0.45 0.97 / .955 29 / 30 0.71 Top Load 0.02 0.0431 / 0.042 29 / 30 0.71

Burst Strength 38 82 / 80 29 / 30 0.71

Page 147: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

122

Table 5.4.2 categorises the extended DoE including 4 unique trials and 5 repeats.

Augmentation of the existing DoE is required to improve the optimisation results by

moving the optimum point away from the design boundaries. Augmented DoE comprises

a total of twenty-six unique trials comprising fifteen Voridian CA12 PET - RPET blends

and eleven BB7755 PET - RPET blends are included in the DoE.

Table 5.4-2 DoE augmented experimental run for improved resolution

Experiment #

Mould

Temperature

(oC)

Blow

Time (s)

Preform

Cooling

(s)

Material Virgin

%

RPET

%

Exp # 22 110 7 4 BB7755 0.600 0.400

Exp # 23 95 3 6 CA12 0.733 0.267

Exp # 24 110 7 5 CA12 1 0

Exp # 25 110 3 6 CA12 0.600 0.400

Exp # 23R 95 3 6 CA12 0.733 0.267

Exp # 24R 110 7 5 CA12 1 0

Exp # 25R 110 3 6 CA12 0.600 0.400

Exp # 22R 110 7 4 BB7755 0.600 0.400

Exp # 23RR 95 3 6 CA12 0.733 0.267

Additional tests were carried out upon completion of augmented DoE. These included

BS, TLS, S1, S2 and St. All Data sets were calculated and analysed in Microsoft Excel

2003. Both mean and SD data points for all experimental sets were inserted into Echip

software for additional analysis. The final results showed improved statistical

significance via augmented design and response variables.

Page 148: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

123

5.5. Results summary table augmented results The results summary table as presented in figure 5.5-1 demonstrated an improvement in

response and process variables by way of the augmented DoE. Amelioration in hot-fill

shrinkage (S2) is primarily enhanced via preform temperature. A statistical significance

represented as (α ) recorded 0.0002 (S2) result. Burst test statistical significance

improvement observes (α ) results of 0.0003 for preform cooling time and 0.0001 for

material and recycled material type. Improvements in process shrinkage (S1) demonstrate

statistical significance with preform temperature. Mould temperature – that is heat-set

temperature – did not demonstrate favourably in hot-fill (S2) shrinkage, recording (α )

result of 0.0914. Results for process shrinkage (S1) demonstrated similar results.

Table 5.5-1 Results summary table to Optimised Echip Results using Augmented Quadratic Model

Page 149: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

124

5.6.1. Results contour 1-D augmented DoE plots Analysis of figure 5.6.1-1, excluding the remaining process and response variables

validate improvements to hot-fill shrinkage (S2). Furthermore, the current 1-D contour

plot shows that heat-set temperatures above 107 oC increase thermal stability of the PET

container. Augmented DoE 1-D contour plots for hot-fill shrinkage (S2) are presented in

appendices D – 1 to 3.

Figure 5.6.1-1 Contour 1-D plot for hot-fill shrinkage against mould temperature

As blow time – that is duration – remains constant, a decrease in hot fill shrinkage occurs

as a function of preform cooling time. A decrease in preform cooling time increases the

preform surface temperature. Furthermore, additional improvements in hot-fill shrinkage

are validated with increased preform surface temperature (PST). This is demonstrated in

Hot-Fill Shrinkage

0

5

10

15

20

80 85 90 95 100 105 110

Mould Temperature

Limits

Mould Temperature

Material Order = 1

Material = 0.487 Recycled = 0.513

Blow Time = 5.0 (s) Preform Cooling Time = 5.0 (s)

Page 150: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

125

figure 5.6.1-2. A detailed discussion concerning the influence of preform cooling time

and preform surface temperature is discussed in chapter 7.3.1.

Figure 5.6.1-2 Contour 1-D plot for hot-fill shrinkage and preform cooling time

Pareto effects chart for augmented DoE were constructed. Validated data for hot-fill

properties by way of preform cooling time are reported. Similar results are presented in

Pareto effects chart figure 5.3.1-1. Mould temperature material did not enhance

thermally stable of PET containers at elevated temperatures. Comparative effects for

mould temperature recycled combinations are recorded, authenticating improved

dimensional stability at elevated temperatures.

Pareto effects chart combining augmented data sets were used to compare observable

changes presented in figure 5.3.1-1. The DoE demonstrates some effect terms as

10

20

30

40

50

4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0

Preform Cooling Time

Hot-fill and Preform Cooling Time

Preform Cooling Time

Mould Temperature = 95.0 (s)Duration = 5.0 (s) Material = 0.516 Recycled = 0.484 Material Order = 1

Limits

Page 151: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

126

undecided. A reduction in eliminated terms is observed. Mould temperature preform

cooling time is eliminated from the model. Figure 5.6.1-3 list the Pareto effects chart

derived for augmented DoE results. Improvements in process variables for improved

thermal stability are demonstrated. Pareto effects by way of augmented results for BS and

TLS are viewed in appendices E -1 and 2.

Figure 5.6.1-3 Pareto effects augmented chart for hot-fill shrinkage

5.6.2. Results contour 2-D augmented plots Figure 5.6.2-1 includes a 2-D contour interaction plot for hot-fill shrinkage (S2) versus

mould temperature and blow time. Hot-fill shrinkage (S2) is minimised with decreasing

mould temperatures and increased blow time. Furthermore, a combination of CA12 virgin

– RPET blend, including a preform cooling time of 5 seconds with low (80 oC) heat set

Effect

7 Mould Temperature*Preform Cooling Time

Term

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pareto Effects for Hot-Fill Shrinkage

3 Preform Cooling Time+8 Mould Temperature*Material -9 Mould Temperature*Recycled +13 Preform Cooling Tim*Material +10 Blow Time*Preform Cooling Time-14 Preform Cooling Tim*Recycled-16 Mould Temperature^2-21 Material Order [2]-11 Blow Time*Material+12 Blow Time*Recycled-1 Mould Temperature+

+ 4 Material+ 5 Recycled-

Page 152: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

127

temperatures indicates improved final S2 values. This finding was significant as the

literature survey indicates increased heat-set temperature contributes to improved heat

resistant PET beverage containers for hot-fill applications (Mc Chesney et al. 1983).

However the current findings from this research demonstrated in the presence of low

heat-set temperatures, dimensional stability is also governed via process conditions

(Maruhashi 2001) and the inclusion of virgin – RPET blends.

Figure 5.6.2-1 Augmented 2-D Interaction plots for hot-fill shrinkage against mould temperature and blow time

Additional 2-D contour interaction plot for hot-fill and preform temperature were

constructed. The DoE software predicts similar hot-fill shrinkage (S2) results for mould

temperatures between 90 - 97 oC. Preform cooling times between 4 – 5 s is predicted.

Middle Blow Time = 5.0 (s) High Blow Time = 7.0 (s)

Preform Cooling Tim = 5.0 (s)

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

80 85 90 95 100 105 110 Mould Temperature

Hot-fill augmented 2-D plot

Low Blow Time = 3.0 (s)

Material = 0.487

Recycled = 0.513

Material Order = 1

S2 %

Page 153: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

128

This trend begins to plateau above temperatures of 97 oC (see figure 5.6.2-2). However, at

increased mould temperatures, hot-fill (S2) shrinkage decreases with static blow time. An

increase in preform temperature - preform cooling of 4 s – yields improved thermal

stability with increasing mould temperatures. However, thermal stability at elevated

temperatures is possible at lower mould temperatures. In all three cases, an increase in

perform temperatures increased the S2 shrinkage as a function of increased mould

temperatures (up to 100 oC). Improvements to S2 – that is a decrease in S2 – occur when

higher heat set temperatures above 102 oC takes place. The DoE suggest a material

formulation of CA 12 virgin 48.7 percent – RPET 51.3 percent blend.

Figure 5.6.2-2 Augmented 2-D Interaction plots for hot-fill shrinkage against mould temperature and preform cooling time

Middle Preform Cooling Time = 5.0 (s) Long Preform Cooling Time = 6.0 (s)

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

80 85 90 95 100 105 110

Mould Temperature

Hot-fill Shrinkage and Mould Temperature

Short Preform Cooling Time = 4.0 (s)

Blow Time = 5.0 (s) Material = 0.487 Recycled = 0.513 Material Order = 1

S2 %

Page 154: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

129

5.7. DoE Optimised Condition for ISBM Process Addressing the research aims needed to gain knowledge in the following areas. These

include:-

• An increase in heat-set temperatures and its effects on hot-fill shrinkage (S2)

• inclusion of Visy RPET and its effects on thermal stability at elevated

temperatures with increased heat-set temperatures.

Figure 5.7-1 is a compilation of the top 5% hot-fill shrinkage results demonstrating

superior dimensional stability. Experimental number 15 demonstrates the best S2

results for all experimental data. Hot-fill shrinkage (S2) of 2.14 % was observed. A

preform surface temperature (PST) of 117 oC is recorded at SP02, located in the

middle of the preform. A base PST of 102.5 oC (SP03) was recorded including 125.3

oC observed for SP01. Chapter 4.3-2 provides a schematic to PST data points. Figure

5.7-1 demonstrates the top 5 % validated results for minimised hot-fill shrinkage (S2).

Reference to all ISBM experimental data is found in appendices B- 1.

Complete 2-D contour plots for burst strength test versus mould temperature, hot-fill

shrinkage (S2) versus preform cooling time and top load versus preform cooling time

graphs via augmented DoE results are made public in appendices F – 1 to 3.

Page 155: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

130

Augmented DoE Hotfill Shrinkage S2 Results

2

2.5

3

3.5

4

4.5

5

5.5

6

Exp # 1 Exp # 2 Exp # 3 Exp # 4 Exp # 5 Exp # 6 Exp # 7 Exp # 11 Exp # 13 Exp # 15 Exp # 22 Exp #22RR

Experimental Number

Shrin

kage

%

Mean (+) Std Dev (-) Std Dev

Figure 5.7-1 Hot-fill shrinkage results obtained via augmented DoE presenting all S2 results below 5 percent shrinkage, measuring a total of 40 percent of all data points

including repeats

Preform temperature is an important parameter to the heat-set process. As preform

temperatures increase, a decrease in container shrinkage has been observed (Buehrig

2000; Nakamura 1989). A summary of the preform temperatures for experiment number

15 is demonstrated in table 5.7-3

Table 5.7-1 Example of temperature recordings for PST experimental 15

Although increasing preform surface temperature yields improvements to hot-fill

shrinkage (S2), temperatures above 103 oC in SP03 contributed to flash at the base. With

the presence of flash, during burst test experiments, containers failed to yield high and

consistent burst pressure, failing at the location of flash.

Blow Time

(s)

Preform Cooling Time

(s)

Preform Temp oC Spot 1

Preform Temp oC Spot 2

Preform Temp oC Spot 3

Exp # 15 3 4 125.3 117.3 102.5

Page 156: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

131

The literature shows increasing heat-set temperature increase process shrinkage (S1) (Mc

Chesney et al. 1983; Nakamura 1989). Figure 5.7-2 presents the 7 best performing

process shrinkage (S1) results obtained via Microsoft Excel. Full graphs containing

process shrinkage (S1), hot-fill shrinkage (S2) are presented in appendices G- 1 and 2.

Experiment numbers 10, 17, 25 and 25 R recorded a heat set temperature of 110 oC.

Experiment numbers 18, 23 R and 23 RR recorded a heat set temperature of 95 oC. From

the data, CA 12 demonstrates increase process shrinkage stability. In all cases this

improvement in S1 results included RPET blend materials. Results for process shrinkage

(S1), hot-fill shrinkage (S2), Hot Fill (V2) volume (Vo), bottle weight (grams), nominal

volume (V1) after 72 hrs production, average panel thickness and burst test results are

presented in appendices H – 1.

Process Shrinkage (S1) as a function of increases heat- set temperatures

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1

1.1

Exp # 10 Exp # 17 Exp # 18 Exp # 25 Exp # 23R Exp # 25R Exp # 23RR

Experimental Number

Shrin

kage

%

Mean (+) Std Dev (-) Std Dev Figure 5.7-2 Process shrinkage as a function of heat-set temperatures.

Page 157: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

132

5.8. Optimised DoE heat-set temperatures Additional analysis into the effects of heat-set was undertaken to address the research

aims. An understanding concerning the influence of heat-set temperatures above 110 oC

was of interest. The effects on hot-fill shrinkage properties (S2) as a function of increased

heat-set temperatures, and the inclusion of RPET and its influence on thermal stability at

elevated temperatures required further analysis. A heat-set temperature range of 120 to

150 oC was considered.

5.8.1. Optimised heat-set conditions An extended DoE model was developed utilising the optimised operating conditions

established during previous experimental results. Echip incorporates a useful function

where specific trade-off values to response variables can be undertaken. Trade-off

parameters include setting specific values to;

• Burst test set to maximum results as defined by the experimental data (1545 kPa),

• hot-fill shrinkage set to minimum as defined by the experimental data (2.29 %),

• top load strength set to maximum as defined by the experimental data (0.49 kN).

Echip calculated the optimum process conditions, where figure 5.8.1-1 records the

predicted trade-off parameters. These optimised conditions include;

• mould temperature of 95 oC

• material blend consisting of 96 percent Voridian CA 12 and 4 percent Visy RPET

• A blow time of 4.2 secs

• preform cooling time of 6 seconds

• Predicted hot-fill shrinkage of 2.86 %.

Page 158: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

133

Figure 5.8.1-1 Response graph demonstrating Optimum point for Heat-set Application

PET containers were manufactured using the suggested trade-off optimised process

conditions. Heat-set temperatures between 120 – 150 oC were applied to see the influence

on S2 shrinkage results with high heat set temperatures. All previous process conditions

for CA12 –RPET blend are presented in table 4.2-3.

5.8.2. Optimised heat-set conditions via Goal Seek parameters

Echip software was used to place additional constraints (goal seek) on response variables.

These included minimising hot-fill shrinkage (S2); to ensure adequate burst strength

sufficient for industrial application and adequate top load strength for capping and

stacking capabilities. The following goal seek constraints were applied to the software;

• burst test to 1300 kPa,

Trade off Max

Blow Time

2.86 % S2 ECHIP

3.0

3.5 4.0

4.5 5.0

5.5

6.0 6.5

7.0

4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0

Preform Cooling Tim

3.0

3.3 Recycled = 0.040 Material Order = 1

Value 2.86 % Preform = 6.00 (s) Blow Time= 4.20 (s)

Material = 0.960 Mould Temperature = 95.0 (s)

Page 159: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

134

• a maximum hot-fill shrinkage (S2) no more than 2.5 %

• top load of 0.42 kN.

As discussed in section 5.7, point 3 PST above 103 oC included flash located at the base

of the PET container. Echip DoE has a unique function where the user is able to assign

additional constraints (design constraints) on design variables.

Strongest 2-D interaction plots as indicated by the Pareto Effects chart in figure 5.6.1-1

were developed. These results have been previously reported in figure 5.6.2-1 and figure

5.6.2-2. Analysis of the DoE plots predicted a blow time range between 3 to 4.6 seconds

when hot-fill shrinkage properties is considered. An optimum preform cooling time range

between 4 to 6 seconds is suggested by the DoE. These values were used as design

constraints to optimise the ISBM process for heat-set application with increase RPET

inclusion.

In figure 5.8.2-1, a final goal seek target with optimised conditions were presented. The

goal seek values used were Echip software suggests the following optimised conditions;

• a blow time of 3 seconds

• a preform cooling time of 4 seconds

• a mould temperature of 80 oC

• a material formulation of 60 percent BB7755 and 40 percent RPET.

Page 160: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

135

Figure 5.8.2-1 Burst strength (BS), S2 and top – load results observed without constraints.

A preform cooling time of 4 seconds yielded high point 3 PST, resulting in flashing at the

base of the PET container. This result in previous ISBM experimental data lead to poor

burst test results and a container representing a non conforming product when placed on

its base. Therefore, additional constraints were placed on the preform cooling time design

variables. These constraints included a range between 4.5 – 5 s. This temperature range is

presented in figure 5.6.2-2.

3.0

3.5

4.0

4.5

5.0

5.5

6.0

6.5

7.0

80 85 90 95 100 105 110

Mould Temperature

Goal Seek Target

(-1.3) (-1.2)

(-1.1)

(-1.1)

(-1.0)

(-0.9)

(-0..8)

(-0.8)

(-0.7)

(-0.6)

(-0.5)

Preform Cooling Tim = 4.0 (s) Material = 0.600 Recycled = 0.400 Material Order = 2

Value -1.39

Mould Temp= 80.00 oC Blow Time=3.00 (s)

Blow Time

Page 161: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

136

5.8.3. Optimised heat-set conditions via trade off constraints

Figure 5.8.3-1 recommend final results obtained via Echip software incorporating

constrained design variables, as suggested in section 5.8.2.

Figure 5.8.3-1 Results from constraint values for burst, S2 and top load results observed from Echip.

The final optimised ISBM conditions according to Echip for hot-fill applications include

suggest;

• preform cooling time of 4.5 seconds

• material blend of 60 percent SkyPET BB7755 and 40 percent Visy RPET.

• Mould temperature of 80 oC

• Blow time of 7 s

ECHIP

3.0

3.54.0

4.55.0

5.5

6.06.5

7.0

BlowTime (s)

80 85 90 95 100 105 110

Mould Temperature

Trade off Goal Seek Target

(-0.9)

(-0.8)

(-0.8)

(-0.7) (-0.7)

(-0.7)

(-0.6)

(-0.5)

Preform Cooling Tim = 4.5 (s) Material = 0.600 Recycled = 0.400 Material Order = 2

Value -0.95

Mould Tem= 80.00 oC Blow Time=7.00 (s)

Page 162: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 5 Design of Experiment

137

The recommended heat-set temperatures of 80 oC were ignored, and heat-set temperatures

between 120 – 150 oC were applied.

5.9. Validation of Optimised ISBM DoE During the manufacturing of optimised CA12 – RPET blends as described in section 5.8-

1; an interest in the accuracy of the DoE was undertaken. An increase in point 3 PST

resulted in flashing at the base. During the manufacturing of beverage containers

including 96 percent CA 12 and 4 percent RPET, 0.1 second decrease in preform cooling

time was applied. This resulted in flashing existing at the base of the PET container.

Increasing the preform cooling time back to the optimised cycle time (4.2 seconds)

eliminated flashing from the base of the container. This demonstrated the DoE software

was running close to the processing window, and that the details generated reflected the

ISBM process.

Page 163: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 6 Heat-set thermal analysis and characterisation

138

6. Chapter 6: Heat-set thermal analysis and characterisation.

Page 164: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 6 Heat-set thermal analysis and characterisation

139

6.1 Thermal Analysis Thermal analysis was used to characterise thermal properties of each polymer material.

PET samples were prepared – as introduced in chapter 3.6 titled Thermal Analysis – and

results analysed via TA Instruments Universal software version 3.9A. MDSC is used to

measure quantitatively the percentage crystallinity )(χ for PET samples (Gruver et al.

2000). Endothermic and exothermic behavioural changes present in the PET panel

sections due to optimised process conditions were investigated. Thermal events

concerning the kinetics and heat constants of glass transition temperature (Tg), cold

crystallisation temperature (Tcc), heat of fusion cold crystallisation peak ( ( ),ccHΔ specific

heat ( )Cρ , temperature melting point (Tm), enthalpy of melting ,( )m totalHΔ , enthalpy of

melting Non reverse heat flow( )NRHΔ , enthalpy of melting reverse heat flow ( )RHΔ ,

heat of fusion crystallisation peak ( )cHΔ and percentage crystallinity )(χ as a function of

heat-set time was investigated.

DSC methods have been used to investigate the degree of crystallinity )(χ for PET

samples (Bashir Z et al. 2000; Gohil 1994; Kong et al. 2002; Reading et al. 2001). In the

absence of Tcc, equation 6-1 is used to determine the )(χ by the DSC method.

100, ×Δ

Δ=

c

totalmc H

Equation 6-1

Page 165: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 6 Heat-set thermal analysis and characterisation

140

Where

totalmH ,Δ = Enthalpy of melting

cHΔ = Heat of fusion 100 % crystalline PET material

6.2. Glass Transition Kinetic responses within the glass transition temperature as a response to thermal history

was analysed. The reversing heat capacity (rev ρC ) data obtained during thermal analysis

was used to determine the Tg temperature. One other method for obtaining Tg temperature

is by way of the derivative rev ρC curve. In most cases semicrystalline materials Tg

temperature step is mostly asymmetric (Cser 2007). This method was also included to

define Tg temperature as the derivative curve increases the sensitivity of the thermal

change as a function of time.

The thermal analysis software does not include a Gaussian fitting function to determine

the Tg peak. Therefore the maximum peak was established between the full widths of the

thermal events. Two data points are contained within the derivative curve and the peak

position is defined as the Tg temperature. An example of Tg temperature defined by the

above mentioned procedure is demonstrated in figure 6.2-1. The remaining Tg

temperatures attained are presented in appendices N - a, b, c and d. Full analysis of Tg

temperature are presented in chapter 7.7.1. Complete derivative rev ρC and rev ρC

thermographs are presented in appendices I – a, b, c, d; J – a, b, c, d; K – a, b, c, d; L – a,

b, c, d.

Page 166: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 6 Heat-set thermal analysis and characterisation

141

63.45°C113.45°C

88.89°C

-0.02

-0.01

0.00

0.01

0.02

0.03

Der

iv. R

ev C

p (J

/g/°

C/°

C)

63.45 73.45 83.45 93.45 103.45 113.45

Temperature (°C) Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

Figure 6.2-1 Derivative reversing heat capacity curve for optimised heat-set BB7755 – RPET blend

6.3. Integration limits via extrapolation method An integration base line is incorporated to TMDSC thermographs deploying an

extrapolation method. The construction of integration limits is marked on the kinetic heat

flow curve. TMDSC non reversing heat flow curves measured in W/g are obtained by

way of the first heating run. In the absence of Tcc, a tangent line is drawn from the start

of the integration limits and terminates at the end of Tm peak. Extrapolation limits for total

heat of fusion ( HΔ ) is carried out in total heat flow curves.

Tg Value

Page 167: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 6 Heat-set thermal analysis and characterisation

142

Extrapolation of the kinetic heat of fusion is undertaken in non reversing heat flow

curves. A tangent lines for both non reversing heat flow and heat flow curves is

preformed as close to zero baseline as possible (Bashir Z et al. 2000; Cser 2007). Figure

6.3-1 demonstrates an example extrapolation method used is this research study. A total

heat flow curve thermograph is used to determine integration limits for all thermal

analysis. All thermographs demonstrating the extrapolation method are located in I – a,

b, c and d.

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300-0.2

0.0

Kin

Hea

t flo

w [W

/g]

Temperature [°C]

Figure 6.3-1Example integration limits procedure used for thermal analysis investigation for optimised heat-set PET beverage containers.

Separate integration limits for optimised heat-set samples are consolidated in total heat

flow and heat capacity non reversing curves. An example of a thermograph demonstrating

the extrapolation method used to determine the NRHΔ by way of non reversing heat flow

curve as shown in Figure 6.3-2.

However, where Tcc temperature is present due to quench cooling, equation 6-3-1 is

enforced to determine the cχ where:-

Page 168: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 6 Heat-set thermal analysis and characterisation

143

c

cctotalmc H

HHΔ

Δ−Δ= ,χ

Equation 6.3-1

Where

=Δ totalmH , Enthalpy of melting

=Δ ccH Heat of fusion cold crystallisation peak

=Δ cH Heat of fusion 100 % crystalline PET material

The crystallinity values derived via equation 6.3-1 does not represent a true measure of

crystallinity when compared to wide and small x-ray scattering (TA Instruments 2004).

Furthermore, establishing the integration limits is not easily discernible for each

thermograph. It is best to carry out extrapolation of integration limits with near perfect

baselines (Thomas 2004)

.

Page 169: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 6 Heat-set thermal analysis and characterisation

144

222.32°C

180.72°C15.70J/g11.63 % crystallized

-0.15

-0.10

-0.05

0.00

0.05

0.10N

onre

v H

eat F

low

(W/g

)

30 80 130 180 230 280

Temperature (°C)

p p @Size: 8.7000 mgMethod: Conventional MDSCComment: Heat Set Sample @120 C repeat for thermal investigation

DSC@

Operator: JPRun Date: 21-Nov-06 09:07Instrument: DSC Q100 V8.2 Build 268

Exo Up Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

Figure 6.3-2 Thermograph for optimised heat-set 120 oC 60 % BB7755 – 40 % RPET extrapolation method

6.4. Initial crystallinity via TMDSC method TMDSC was used to determine cχ for all PET samples as a function of optimised heat-

set temperature. DSC curves are limited as analysis can only include the total heat flow

curves. This enables the determination of ccHΔ Tcc, fHΔ , Tm and Tg. However, DSC

methods do not include the heat capacity term, which is the ρC multiplied by the heating

rate as shown in equation 2.10.2-2. TMDSC includes the reversing, ( RHΔ ) and non

reversing ( NRHΔ ) heating curve as well as the total heat flow curve. This technique

Page 170: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 6 Heat-set thermal analysis and characterisation

145

provides greater sensitivity when determining the crystallinity value for a polymer.

Doubts concerning the TMDSC method have been expressed (Bashir et al. 2000).

However, due to the improved resolution when determining the initial crystallinity cχ via

TMDSC, this method was used for this research study. Equation 6-4-1 is expressed as:-

c

Rtotalmc H

HHΔ

Δ−Δ= ,χ

Equation 6.4-1

Where

=Δ totalmH , Enthalpy of melting

=Δ RH Enthalpy of melting Non reversing heat flow

=Δ cH Heat of fusion 100 % crystalline PET material

Integration limits were chosen as described in section 6.2. Thermograph plots for

optimised heat-set temperatures were undertaken. Results were collated and analysed for

changes in thermal properties as a function of optimised heat-set temperature. Table 6.3-1

lists the thermal properties for optimised 60 percent BB7755 – 40 percent RPET blends.

Thermal analysis results for all raw material PET samples as supplied from raw material

manufactures can be found in appendices N- 1.

The literature values for cHΔ varies from 84.5 J/g (Miyagi et al. 1972) to 165 J/g (Grulke

et al. 1999). As part of this analysis, cHΔ of 135 J/g was used as being the most common

Page 171: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 6 Heat-set thermal analysis and characterisation

146

value used (Mehta et al. 1978). Thermal analysis results are presented in chapter 7.7 and

proceeding chapters.

6.5. Density Measurements Thermal analysis results did not show a linear trend for Tg temperature or cχ as a function

of heat-set temperature as reported by previous studies (Jabarin 1995; Liu. R.F et al.

2004; Mc Chesney et al. 1983). Density measurement experiments were undertaken to

validate optimised DoE TMDSC results. Localised density measurements were conducted

as described in chapter 4.10. Test samples were taken from the panel region, 46 mm along

the axial length of the PET container. This position was chosen to reflect the same

position used for test specimens whilst performing TMSDC experiments. Figure 4.10-1

demonstrate a schematic representing actual location and sample size taken for each test

sample.

Final assessment of localised density measurements showed no linear increase in density

as a function of optimised heat-set temperature. Density measurements for 120 oC

demonstrated an increase in density. Final localised density measurements and

crystallinity results are shown in table 6.5-1. Results are discussed in chapter 7.7.2

Table 6.5-1 Localised density and percentage crystallinity measurements.

Heat Set Temperature

120 oC 130 oC 140 oC 150 oC

Density Localised Point 1.357216 1.34504 1.345901 1.35369

Percentage crystallinity 19.849 9.869032 10.57491 16.95894

)(ρ

),( pcφ

Page 172: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 6 Heat-set thermal analysis and characterisation

147

Further density measurements were performed to validate optimised heat-set conditions.

The test method included the entire PET panel section to each optimised heat-set BB7755

– RPET blends and process conditions. Experiments were performed as described in

chapter 4.11. Density values measured demonstrated an increase in density as a function

of optimised heat-set DoE. Final results are presented in table 6.5-2.

Table 6.5-2 Entire panel section density and percentage crystallinity measurements.

Heat Set Temperature

120 oC 130 oC 140 oC 150 oC

Density Panel Average 1.343773 1.344315 1.351884 1.35347

Percentage crystallinity 8.830502 9.274989 15.47837 16.77853

All density measurement discussions and volume fraction crystallinity determinations are

presented and discussed in chapter 7.8.

6.6. Validation of Tg Temperature using DMTA

Dynamic Mechanical Thermal Analysis (DMTA) was used to validate the Tg temperature

for BB7755 – RPET optimised DoE blends with heat-set temperature range between 120

– 150 oC. DMTA is consider the most sensitive analytical device for measuring Tg of

polymers (Luckenbach 2001). TMDSC Tg temperature results will demonstrate lower

values as a function of polymer type and blend (Cheremisinoff 1996).

)(ρ

),( pcφ

Page 173: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 6 Heat-set thermal analysis and characterisation

148

A DMA 2980 TA Instruments was used for this experiment. DMTA was chosen to

measure the mechanical properties to each optimised DoE BB7755 – RPET blend. This

included loss tangent ( )δtan and storage ( )G′ and loss )(G ′′ modulus with comparisons

made to incremental heat-set temperatures. Test samples were measured between

temperature ranges of 25 – 200 oC. A programmed step rate temperature scan of 5 oC /

minute and frequency of 1 rad / s was applied. Thermographs where plotted in Microsoft

Excel 2003, which reported storage modulus ( )G′ and loss modulus )(G ′′ . Further graphs

including ( )δtan versus temperature were also reported. Results are presented in chapter

7.9.

6.7. Morphological analysis of heat-set containers Small angle x-ray scattering (SAXS) studies were undertaken to analyse evolutional

changes to morphology. 2D scattering patterns from SAXS data were used to measure

qualitative changes in crystallinity and morphology as a function of optimised BB7755 –

RPET heat-set temperatures. Details outlining the optimised DoE are presented in chapter

5.8.2 titled Optimised heat-set conditions via goal seeks parameters.

Test samples were taken from similar positions to TMDSC and density studies. Figure

6.7-1 makes evident the experimental preparation of the sample.

Page 174: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 6 Heat-set thermal analysis and characterisation

149

Figure 6.7-1 Schematic layout indicating beam direction for all SAXS measurements indicating hoop and axial direction of panel section

A 15-ID-D beamline ChemMatCARS (Advanced Photon Source, Chicago, IL) SAXS

experimental equipment was used. An X-ray beam of wavelength 1.3 angstrom (Å), 9.54

(kiloelectron volts (keV),) was applied to the experiment. 2D SAXS patterns were

obtained incorporating a Bunker 6000 CCD detector. An active area of 94 × 94 mm2 with

pixel size of 92 mμ located 1887 mm from the test sample location.

The above configuration settings allowed the analysis of molecular dimensions defined as

d-spacing between 40 to 1100 Å. The Bragg’s law is used to derive d-spacing as

expressed in equation 6.6-1:-

θλ sin2d=

Equation 6.7-1

Where

λ = wavelength of the incident radiation

θsin = scattering angle

Sample holder

Hoop Direction

Detector face

Sampled area

Page 175: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 6 Heat-set thermal analysis and characterisation

150

The scattering angle is inversely related to the scattering vector (q) as expressed in

equation 6.6-2 where:-

λθπ sin4

=q

Equation 6.7-2

The relationship of q is related to the scattered X-ray on the 2D detector. An angstrom

size of 0 Å -1 for q is recorded at the centre of the detector. A total q range for the SAXS

instrument configuration as described above was 0.007, which is less than q, being less

than 0.3 Å -1 in size. A beam width of 100 mμ and a beam height of 100 mμ were

applied. The intensity of the incident beam is measured approximately 1012

photons sec-1.

Data collection during experiments was set to 10 second intervals (Hanley et al. 2006) .

Results obtained from SAXS measurements were manipulated and analysed in Fit2D

software. A typical 2D scattering pattern is demonstrated in figure 6.7-2. An intensity

scale, which is a measure of the counts per pixel, is located on the bottom of image.

SAXS discussion of results is presented in chapter 7.10

Page 176: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 6 Heat-set thermal analysis and characterisation

151

Figure 6.7-2 A typical SAXS 2D scattering pattern example for panel section for optimised DoE 60 % BB7755 – 40 % RPET

Page 177: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

152

7. Chapter 7: Results and Discussions

Page 178: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

153

7.1. Mechanical Properties for PET samples used. Tensile strength, elastic modulus and shrinkage properties are mechanical attributes

governed by the final crystallinity of the material, crystalline structure and amorphous

arrangements for oriented PET (Jabarin 1996). Tensile tests were undertaken to quantify

the following mechanical and elastic properties of Voridian CA 12, SkyPET BB7755 and

Visy RPET materials. These include

• yield stress ( maxσ )

• Youngs modulus (E)

• Percentage elongation at break.

Injection moulding process conditions are detailed in chapter 3.7.1. Tensile testing

conditions and sample preparation have been presented in chapter 3.7.3.

7.1.1. Comparative Results for Maximum Yield

stress. Figure 7.1.1-1 presents maximum yield stress ( maxσ ) for all materials. Voridian CA12

demonstrates superior yield stress when compared to other test samples. Mechanical

properties are dependent on the amorphous morphology of the material (Gohil 1993b).

Standard deviation and coefficient variations (CV) for all tensile test results are presented

in appendices O – 1.

Page 179: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

154

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

BB7755 CA12 RPETMaterial

Stre

ss

MP

Figure 7.1.1-1Tensile test results demonstrating yield stress (max) for all PET samples used in this study

7.1.2. Comparative Results for Young Modulus

The modulus of elasticity (E) was used to analyse data concerning the relative stiffness to

each material. Modulus values are presented in figure 7.1.2-1. Results obtained revealed

similar trends to those viewed in figure 7.1.1-1. Youngs modulus (E) values were

analysed with the use of Microsoft Excel 2003; defined within the linear region – the

tangent area – up to the proportional limits within the graphs.

Page 180: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

155

Figure 7.1.2-1Comparative Young’s modulus results to all PET samples via tensile testing before heat-set analysis.

7.1.3. Comparative Results for Elongation at break

Elongation at break results is presented in figure 7.1.3-1. SkyPET BB7755 and Voridian

CA 12 demonstrate similar viscoelastic properties. (Visy RPET demonstrate permanent

deformation over a decrease strain when comparison is made to SkyPET BB7755 and

Voridian CA 12. The displacement of molecules are not able to slip back to there original

position, demonstrating more solid like behaviour (Shah 1998). RPET materials are

classified as hard and brittle fractures, as compared to hard and strong for SkyPET

BB7755 and Voridian CA 12. The plasticity of RPET is lower, with permanent

deformation observed via a decrease in strain. The sample failed to neck, as compared to

Voridian CA 12 or SkyPET BB7755. No test specimens demonstrated strain hardening

during experiments.

Page 181: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

156

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

BB7755 CA12 RPETMaterials

Elo

ngat

ion

@ B

reak

(%)

Figure 7.1.3-1Comparative elongation at break results to all PET samples via tensile

testing before heat-set analysis.

7.1.4. Izod Impact test

Izod impact – a single point test – measures the materials resistance to impact.

Quantitative data was collected and analysed in Microsoft Excel 2003. Sample

preparation and injection moulding conditions are presented in chapter 3.7.1 and 3.7.2.

Izod impact properties are shown in figure 7.1.4-1 and measurements presented as J/m2.

SkyPET BB7755 virgin grade demonstrated superior impact properties as compared to

Voridian CA 12 and Visy RPET. All samples showed a completed fractured at the notch,

breaking in the edge wise direction. A linear decrease in impact resistance is observed for

all materials. Appendices O – 2 list the full set of data including standard deviation and

mean.

Page 182: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

157

1500.00

1750.00

2000.00

2250.00

2500.00

2750.00

3000.00

3250.00

BB7755 CA12 RPETMaterials

Impa

ct E

nerg

y J

/ m2

Figure 7.1.4-1Izod impact results for PET materials

7.2. Rheological properties

7.2.1. Intrinsic Viscosity Intrinsic viscosity (IV) measurements were conducted as discussed in chapter 3.5.1.

Results obtained for IV were analysed and reported as dL/g. The measured IV results

incorporated the Mark Houwink equation discussed in equation 2.9-1 and 2.9-2 to

estimate nM and wM . End group concentration was calculated via equation 7.2.1-1.

nMc

6102×=

Equation 7.2.1-1

Page 183: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

158

The results demonstrated Voridian CA 12 to yield the highest IV measurements. This

translates into molecular weight average ( wM ) of 54,703.22 g / mol. The results indicate

Voridian CA 12 to inherit an increase in molecular chain length and size of molecules as

compared to SkyPET BB7755 and Visy RPET (Chung 2000a).

Table 7.2.1-1 Results summary table to molecular number and weight average, Polydispersity index and end group concentration.

nM wM PI c

BB7755 0.77 26,372.88 53,674.98 2.035 85.87 g/mol

CA12 0.780 26,966.18 54,703.22 2.029 74.16 g/mol

RPET 0.760 25,785.14 52,653.00 2.042 75.56 g/mol

7.2.2. Parallel Plate Complex Viscosity data Rheological analysis was undertaken as described in chapter 3.6.3. Rheological properties

including complex viscosity ( *η ), polydispersity index, a measure of the materials

molecular weight distribution (MWD), storage modulus (G′ ) and loss modulus ( G ′′ )

were analysed.

Voridian CA12 showed the highest viscosity at zero shear viscosity ( oη ) at 280 oC when

comparing complex viscosity ( *η ) for SkyPET BB7755 and Visy RPET. Conformation

of higher molecular weight is validated via intrinsic viscosity data presented in table

7.2.1-1. Molecular weight distribution affects the pseudoplasticity behaviour and elastic

properties of a polymer melt (Chung 2000b). Complex viscosity graphs are presented in

figure 7.2.2-1.

η

Page 184: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

159

A decrease in viscosity with increased angular frequencies (ω ) demonstrates an increase

in pseudoplasticity. The result is a decrease in melt viscosity at higher shear rates (γ& ).

This observation is due to molecular realignment and disentanglements of the molecules,

allowing for the dissipation of energy at increased shear rates (Painter et al. 1994). The

complex viscosity data demonstrates a narrow molecular weight distribution (MWD) for

all materials studied (Chung 2000a). Voridian CA12 demonstrates pseudoplasticity –

shear thinning – at increased angular frequencies when comparisons are made to SkyPET

BB7755 and Visy RPET.

Figure 7.2.2-1 Complex viscosity measurements results via parallel plate Rheometer for Voridian CA 12, SkyPET BB7755 and Visy RPET.

CA 12

BB7755

REPT

Page 185: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

160

7.2.3. Polydispersity Index determination. Polydispersity index (PI) values are presented in table 7.2.1-1. Voridian CA12

demonstrates the lowest end group concentration. The PI values, – a reflection of MWD –

is a measure of the reaction time during polymerisation (Odian 1981). The polydispersity

index is expressed in equation 7.2.3-1:

MM

n

w⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛=PI

Equation 7.2.3-1

Where

PI = Polydispersity Index

wM = Molecular weight average

nM = Molecular number average

Results for end group concentration of 74.16 g / mol is reported in table 7.2.3-1 for

Voridian CA12; in this case representing the lowest values for all materials. End group

analysis is helpful to validate the carboxyl / hydroxyl ratio. This knowledge is critical, as

Sodium hydroxide (NaOH) and the carboxyl end groups can yield improvements in

dimensional stability via heterogeneous nucleation. A comprehensive discussion is

presented in section 7.3.4.

Page 186: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

161

7.2.4. Storage Modulus via Parallel plate Storage modulus (G′ ) results for Voridian CA12 demonstrated an increase in rigidity

with increased angular frequency (ω ). As the angular frequency increase, the PET

sample approaches a plateau where the molecular branches become disentangled; the

molecules are able to move more freely (Rosu et al. 1999). Voridian CA 12 exhibits

enhanced mechanical properties to store energy, improved viscoelastic response when

compared to SkyPET BB7755 and Visy RPET elastic limits. This mechanical attribute

assists with improved top load strength for bottle applications. Storage modulus (G′ ) for

CA 12 and its superiority is related to the materials Mw and MWD characteristics

(Gaspar-Rosas 2004). Results for storage and loss modulus are in the same order of

magnitude when compared to previous studies (Daver et al. 2007).

Figure 7.2.4-1. Storage modulus comparisons results via parallel plate Rheometer for Voridian CA 12, SkyPET BB7755 and Visy RPET.

CA 12 BB7755

RPET

Page 187: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

162

7.2.5. Loss Modulus via Parallel plate Rheometer Loss modulus results were determined by using parallel plate characterisation technique.

Results demonstrated increased viscous elasticity for CA12 as it enters the terminal

region. The increase in loss modulus commences to dissipate energy approximately in the

order of one magnitude. A decrease in the rate of deformation for CA12 enters the

rubbery plateau region at lower angular frequencies. The energy dissipation is greater for

CA 12 material.

Figure 7.2.5-1 Loss modulus results via parallel plate Rheometer for Voridian CA 12, SkyPET BB7755 and Visy RPET.

CA 12 BB7755

RPET

Page 188: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

163

RPET is less viscous in behaviour at higher rates of deformation, entering the rubbery

plateau region with increasing angular frequencies, indicating retention of molecular

rotation, hence improving RPET mechanical properties for top load applications.

7.3. Optimisation via Augmented DoE

7.3.1. Preform Surface Temperature The current wisdom concerning improved thermal stability of PET beverage containers is

to increase the percentage crystallinity. Previous studies have shown improving thermal

and mechanical properties to PET materials is not only influenced via heat-set process in

order to increase percentage crystallinity (Boyd 2004; Maruhashi et al. 1996). The main

predisposition used to explain crystallinity increases to sustain an increase in hot-fill

performance is due to increase heat set temperatures.

The degree of crystallinity is an approximation when dealing with the topic of thermal

stability of beverage containers of hot-fill temperatures up to 95 oC (Boyd 2004). The

relationship between thermal stability and percentage crystallinity is more accurately

understood as the interaction in thermal stability - preform surface temperature. The

percentage crystallinity is the result of direct interaction of preform surface temperature

generated during axial stretching. Therefore the improvements to thermal stability of

beverage containers depend on the relaxation phenomena within the amorphous segments

of the material.

Page 189: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

164

Temperature distribution to the PET preform was controlled via injection moulding

cooling time. Preform surface temperatures (PST) were recorded as discussed in section

4.3.2. Analysis was undertaken in Microsoft Excel 2003 and Echip DoE software.

Aoki’s recommended operating process conditions for Eastman 9921 W CSD beverage

containers observes a mean PST of 90.74 oC (Cheng 2004). Temperature determination

for PST carried out by Cheng records the base (SP03) temperatures to the preform.

Reference to the PST temperature locations can be referred to section 4.3.2.

Results demonstrated a preform cooling time of 7 seconds yields the lowest base PST.

Preform cooling time of 7 seconds for SkyPET BB7755 recorded a PST at point 3 of 85.7

oC. A decrease in cooling time to 5 seconds increases PST temperature by 9 %. A further

reduction in preform cooling time to four seconds increases PST temperature by 7 %.

Results are presented in Figure 7.3.1-1.

Preform cooling time had a direct effect on the final properties of each PET beverage

container. A linear regression fit is applied to PST vs. perform cooling time. Microsoft

Excel indicates a R2 of 0.9622, indicating good agreement between PST and preform

cooling time.

Page 190: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

165

R2 = 0.9622

80859095

100105110

3 4 5 6 7Preform Cooling time (Seconds)

Pre

form

Sur

face

Te

mpe

ratu

re S

pot 3

(o C)

Figure 7.3.1-1 Perform surface temperature recorded at point 3 (base).

A decrease in preform cooling time demonstrated improvements to the containers

dimensional stability. A recorded PST measured via FLIR camera for points 1, 2 and 3

observed an average temperature of 113.81 oC for the five best performing hot-fill (S2)

shrinkage results. An average temperature of 100.95 oC is recorded for PST point 3.

Results are presented in tables 7.3.1-2 and 7.3.1-2.

Page 191: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

166

Table 7.3.1-1 Preform surface temperature for the best performing hot-fill shrinkage results

Top 5 hot-fill shrinkage

Exp # PST Spot 3 Av PST 1,2,3

Exp # 1 100.80 112.03

Exp # 5 97.6 113.07

Exp # 6 102.90 115.10

Exp # 15 102.5 115.03

Exp # 22R 102.9 115.2

Average 100.95 113.81

std Dev 2.263405 1.5127

std Dev + 103.2134 115.3219

std Dev - 98.6866 112.2965

The base PST is 6.15 oC hotter as compared to the worst five hot-fill (S2) results. The

average temperature to all measured an increase in temperature of 7.13 oC, compared to

the beverage containers recorded to the poorest hot-fill results.

Table 7.3.1-2 Preform surface temperature for the poorest performing hot-fill shrinkage results

Worst Hot-fill shrinkage

Exp # PST Spot 3 Av PST 1,2,3

Exp #14 90 102.73

Exp # 23 94 106.87

Exp # 25 103.50 114.33

Exp # 23R 91.7 102.80

Exp # 25R 91.9 102.27

Aver 94.8 106.683333

std Dev 5.378383 5.11910387

std Dev + 100.1784 111.802437

std Dev - 89.42162 101.564229

Page 192: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

167

This increase in mean PST reduces the internal stresses generated during the blow

moulding stage, leading to a decrease in (S2) results (Boyd 2004; Maruhashi et al. 1992a).

This discussion presents further validated results concerning PST with reference made to

figure 7.3.1-2 and 7.3.1-3, reflecting preform surface temperature (PST) for SP02 and 03.

R2 = 0.9846

100105110115120125130135140

3 4 5 6 7

Preform cooling time (Seconds)

Pre

form

Sur

face

Tem

pera

ture

S

pot 1

(o C)

Figure 7.3.1-2 Perform surface temperature recorded at point 01 (top of bottle shoulder).

R2 = 0.9831

9095

100105110115120125130

3 4 5 6 7Preform cooling time (seconds)

Pre

form

Sur

face

Te

mpe

ratu

re S

pot 2

(o C)

Figure 7.3.1-3 Perform surface temperature recorded at point 02 (panel section).

Page 193: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

168

Furthermore, an increase in temperature is observed during strain induced crystallisation.

As the molecules are stretched in the axial direction, an increase in temperature is

observed reducing the amorphous orientation. This increase in temperature promotes the

molecules to relieve stress. This process controls the rate of crystallisation.

7.3.2. Process Shrinkage (S1) Process shrinkage (S1) behaviour as a function of blow time, preform cooling time and

heat-set temperature was analysed. Volumetric tests were conducted and results recorded

to determine process shrinkage (S1). The results were separated to determine the 5 best

and poorest performing beverage containers.

Using Microsoft Excel 2003, an auto-filter was utilised seeking the 4 best performing

process shrinkage (S1) results via the initial DoE. Experiment number 9 with a material

blend consisting of 100 % Voridian CA12 was observed. A heat-set temperature of 80 oC

was recorded incorporating a preform cooling time of 4 seconds. A decrease in heat-set

temperature improves the volumetric shrinkage (V1) of the container. These findings are

in good agreement with previous works in this area (Mc Chesney et al. 1983). Figure

7.3.2-1 demonstrates the top 4 beverage containers. Volumetric shrinkage (S1) was

controlled via the blow mould temperatures. A decrease in mould temperature

demonstrates improvements to the beverage containers volume capacity. A full

description of the experimental numbers and material formulation including heat-set

temperatures are presented in appendices B – 1.

Page 194: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

169

0

0.02

0.04

0.06

0.08

0.1

0.12

0.14

0.16

Exp # 7 Exp # 9 Exp # 12 Exp # 15

Experimental Number

Pro

cess

Shr

inka

ge (S

1) %

Figure 7.3.2-1 Top 4 performing process shrinkage (S1) results via Augmented DoE Process shrinkage (S1) improvements are further enhanced via the influence of preform

cooling time. This observation is shown in the top 4 best performing process shrinkage

(S1) results. Each beverage container by way of this experimental set includes a decrease

in preform cooling time (4 seconds) and a blow time range between 3 – 7 seconds. Heat-

set temperature range of 80 – 110 oC is observed. Virgin 100 % Voridian CA 12 and

SkyPET BB7755 is recorded for the best performing process shrinkage (S1) results.

A reduction in preform cooling time of 4 seconds demonstrates an increase in PST. The

preceding section has discussed in detail PST results via the influence of preform cooling

time. Furthermore, PST can also be influenced via heat generation during biaxial

stretching of the preform prior to inflation.

Page 195: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

170

The process stability (S1) is controlled in concert with blow time and preform cooling

time. Relaxation of the amorphous chains is governed by kinetic shrinkage behaviour. As

inflation of the preform occurs, the pressurised air is used to hold the preform against a

heated mould. During the ISBM exhaust cycle, pressurised air used to hold the preform in

contact with the mould is no longer present. The shrinkage kinetics provides freedom to

the extended chain length located in the amorphous region; hence relaxation occurs. As

polymers vary in molecular lengths, the energies required to cool the molecules vary.

Therefore material solidification will vary depending on blow time and mean PST, as

well as amorphous orientation.

The worst performing process shrinkage (S1) results are presented in figure 7.3.3-2. Each

beverage container by way of this experimental set includes an increase in preform

cooling time (6 seconds) and a blow time of 3 seconds. Heat-set temperature range of 95

– 110 oC is observed. Voridian CA 12 and RPET blend is recorded for the worst

performing process shrinkage (S1) results.

Page 196: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

171

0.8

0.85

0.9

0.95

1

1.05

Exp # 23 Exp # 25 Exp # 23R Exp # 25R

Experimental Number

Pro

cess

Shr

inka

ge (S

1) %

Figure 7.3.2-2 High process shrinkage (S1) for Augmented DoE

7.4. Targeted Optimisation via Augmented DoE

7.4.1. Hot-fill shrinkage (S2) An auto-filter search function in Microsoft Excel 2003 sort out 15 percent of beverage

containers with minimised hot-fill (S2) values. Four experimental data sets were recorded.

Preform cooling time of 4 seconds is used in experiment 1, 15 and 22R. Experiment 5

recorded a preform cooling time of 6 seconds. A mean preform surface temperature of

114 oC is recorded for all data sets. Although preform cooling time for experiment

number 5 incurs an increase of 2 seconds, a mean preform surface temperature of 113.7

oC is recorded.

Page 197: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

172

Experimental number 1 and 5 both have blow mould temperatures set to 80 oC. This

research did not find supporting data that indicated increased crystallinity as a function of

increased heat set temperature. Two of the top four beverage containers demonstrating

lowest shrinkage values (S2) include low blow mould temperatures (80 oC). One theory to

support the existing data is explained as mean preform surface temperatures are similar,

the temperature generation as a function of stretch rate can increase the temperature of the

preform further (Maruhashi 2001; Maruhashi et al. 1992b). This increase in orientation

temperature increases the chain mobility, allowing the onset of crystallisation to occur

earlier (Blundella et al. 1999).

This increases the volume of crystal lamellar during axial stretching, therefore improving

the thermal stability of the beverage container. This heat-setting method occurs during

stretching in the axial direction. This process simulates the heat-set process at higher

temperatures (Jabarin 1992). Results demonstrate best and worst performing hot-fill (S2)

results and are presented in figures 7.4.1-1 and 7.4.1-2.

2

2.5

3

3.5

4

4.5

5

Exp # 1 Exp # 5 Exp # 15 Exp # 22RRExperimental Number

Hot

-fill

Shr

inka

ge (S

2) %

Figure 7.4.1-1 Best performing hot-fill shrinkage values via Augmented DoE

Page 198: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

173

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

Exp # 23 Exp # 25 Exp # 23R Exp # 25R

Experimental Number

Hot

-fill

Shr

inka

ge (S

2) %

Figure 7.4.1-2 Worst performing hot-fill shrinkage values via Augmented DoE

The influence on hot-fill shrinkage (S2) is validated via preform cooling time.

Experimental data observed in figure 7.4.1-1 include a preform cooling time of 4 seconds.

Blow times of 3 seconds are reported for all data sets. This suggests blow time did not

influence the thermal stability when reviewing the DoE data set. Experimental data

presented in figure 7.4.1-2 include a preform cooling time of 6 seconds. A blow time of 3

seconds is also reported.

A decrease in preform cooling time from 6 seconds to approximately 4 seconds

demonstrates minimised heat set shrinkage (S2) at elevated temperatures. Conversely an

increase in preform cooling time increases the beverage container shrinkage capabilities,

indicating 6 seconds preform cooling time to represent the worst dimensional stability at

elevated temperatures.

Page 199: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

174

A mean preform surface temperature of 106.57 oC is recorded for data set presented in

figure 7.3.3-2. This is representative of the preform surface temperature results due to an

increase in preform cooling time. The average preform cooling temperature obtained via

figure 7.3.3-1 recorded 113.81 oC. One possible explanation for poor hot-fill (S2)

stability is attributed to low preform surface temperature; upon the ISBM exhaust cycle of

pressurised air allows the bottle to spring away from the blow mould cavity. This is

further complicated by a decrease in amorphous density as the crystallisation rate

increases, allowing an increase in potential shrinkage. Therefore increases in preform

surface temperatures improve thermal stability of PET containers.

The existing wisdom on improving thermal stability of PET beverage containers is to

increase the percentage crystallinity. Previous studies have demonstrated an increase in

percentage crystallinity does not improve the thermal properties (Boyd 2004).

Furthermore, the final crystallinity value is not a good measure of the thermal stability of

a container, and its effects on oxygen permeability (Liu et al. 2004).

Improvements to thermal stability depend on the relaxation phenomena within the

morphology of the material. This result is further validated as all beverage containers

yielding the least performing hot-fill shrinkage values (S2) recorded a preform cooling

time of 6 seconds and 3 seconds blow time. Reference can be made to the DoE model

located in appendices B - 1.

Preform surface temperature has demonstrated a direct influence on the thermal stability

at elevated temperatures. The influence of RPET blends on thermal stability is addressed

in the current section. Analysis was performed incorporating the augmented DoE model,

as discussed in chapter 5.5. Echip DoE software was used for analysis.

Page 200: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

175

Optimised hot-fill results (S2) were constructed combining response variables in the DoE

model. Reference to optimised trade-off parameters have been discussed in chapter 5.8.1.

Observation is made with the inclusion of RPET, minimising dimensional shrinkage at

elevated temperatures. The inclusion of Visy RPET improved the thermal properties to

the PET beverage container. This is a positive result. Previous work undertaken in

injection moulding studies found blending RPET with PET improved the mechanical and

elongational properties (Fann et al. 1996).

Additional analysis was undertaken by fixing particular constraints on response variables

that would meet industry standards for hot-fill applications. The following constraints

applied were:

• Targeted burst strength 1300 kPa

• Targeted top load strength 0.42 kN

• Targeted hot-fill shrinkage 2.50 %

The goal seek targets as discussed in chapter 5.8.2 were predicted in Echip DoE, where an

increase in the RPET content is predicted. A hot-fill shrinkage value of 2.22 % was

obtained from the DoE. A material blend ratio made up of SkyPET BB7755 76 % - Visy

RPET 24 %. The Doe also predicted a preform cooling time of 4 seconds, and a blow

time of 3 seconds. A mould temperature of 104 oC is further predicted. A 2-D contour

plot is presented in figure 7.4.2-3.

Page 201: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

176

Figure 7.4.1-3 Contour 2-D plot for hot-fill shrinkage with targeted mechanical properties for minimised shrinkage.

Improvements to hot-fill (S2) results by way of RPET inclusion can be attributed to the

presence of sodium hydroxide (NaOH). Sodium salts chemically react with the ester

linkages, in this case carboxyl end groups forming sodium carboxylate (Scheirs 2003).

The in situ ionomer can aggregate chain ends and initiate heterogeneous nucleation. It is

found oligomers are obtained via hydrolysis reaction during recycling of PC-PET in the

presence of sodium hydroxide.

Care must be given during the wash cycle in recycling PC-PET. NaOH can reduce IV

properties if not properly removed after washing via the rinse step cycle (Kosior 2007).

This reduction in IV will decrease the wM , and more importantly Tg. This is not favoured

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0

Preform Cooling Time

Hot Fill Shrinkage

3 4

5 7 8

9

11

Blow_Time = 3.0 Material = 0.760 Recycled = 0.240 Material Order = 2

Value Low Limit High Limit 2.22 -4.05 8.49

Preform =4.00 MouldTem=104.00 Value Low Limit High Limit 2.22 -4.05 8.49

Preform =4.00 Mould Temp=104.00

Mould Temperature

Page 202: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

177

for hot-fill applications. The presence of sodium carboxylate (COO- Na+) is an effective

nucleating agent in PET (Pilati et al. 1997; Scheirs 2003). A decrease in the Tc is

observed, decreasing the rate of crystallisation.

Furthermore, the presence of residual catalyst, in this case Sb3O2 influence the

crystallisation rate of PET (Kang 2001; Pilati et al. 1997). Residual Sb3O2 is present due

to the polymerisation reaction of SkyPET BB7755. Improved thermal stability is

observed due to residual Sb3O2 catalyst (Göltner 2004). Therefore, the surplus amount of

Sb3 acts to improve the uniformity of temperature within the preform. An improvement to

thermal stability of the container is demonstrated. The presence of Sb3 ensures uniform

mean preform surface temperature before the inflation process. The inclusion of activated

carbon present in Voridian CA12 imitate similar perform surface temperature

performance.

7.4.2. Burst Test Burst test were analysed to determine mechanical properties of PET beverage containers

and compared results to RPET blends results using Excel 2003. Results are presented in

figure 7.4.2-1. The top 7 burst test results were investigated. The results show an increase

in blow time improves the burst strength performance. Furthermore, an increase in heat

set temperatures also demonstrates improvements to burst test results. However, The

beverage containers withstanding high burst pressure did not include RPET material or

blends. Furthermore, preform cooling times range between 5 – 6 seconds. Experimental

numbers 1, 2, 5, 7, 11, 12 and 22 demonstrated the poorest burst test results. Results for

the worst burst strength are shown in figure 7.4.2-2.

Page 203: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

178

1400

1450

1500

1550

1600

1650

Exp # 8 Exp # 10 Exp # 14 Exp # 18 Exp # 20 Exp # 24 Exp # 24R

Experimental Number

Bur

st P

ress

ure

(Kpa

)

Figure 7.4.2-1 Best performing burst strength result via Augmented DoE

Experiment number 11 demonstrates the worst performing burst strength result.

Temperature of 112.27 oC mean preform surface temperature is recorded. The base

preform surface temperature was observed at 99.00 oC. The seven worst burst strength

results include RPET blends ranging from 20 % to 60 % RPET inclusion except for

experiment number 7. This results, which includes CA12 100 % records a blow time of 7

seconds and a preform cooling time of 4 seconds. The poor results for experiment 7 is

attributed to a 113 oC mean preform surface temperature. More importantly, the base of

the preform was observed at 100.20 oC. The excessive heat within the base of the preform

contributed to flash at the base of the PET beverage container, in turn failing during burst

strength testing.

Page 204: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

179

Figure 7.4.2-2 Worst burst strength results via Augmented DoE

The inclusion of RPET blends at increase addition rates influenced burst strength,

increasing the rigidity of the container, which in turn resulted in a reduce in burst strength

results. This increased rigidity reduced the elastic behaviour of the material; hence burst

results fail at lower pressure values. However maximum burst strength results did not

include RPET blends. properties are improved with small additions of RPET and targeted

process conditions.

Analysis obtained via Echip DoE was performed as described in chapter 5.8.1. The

presence of Visy RPET 4 % is predicted to increase the elastic modulus, therefore

maximising the burst strength. Enhanced mechanical properties are demonstrated in

figure 7.4.2-2. A reduction in preform temperature is predicted, whilst increasing the

Page 205: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

180

blow mould temperature. Furthermore, an increase in burst test is predicted. Similar

results were demonstrated for injection moulding applications (Fann et al. 1996)

Figure 7.4.2-3 Burst test results via maximised constrained values

During the inflation process, axial stretching of the preform takes place, straining the

molecules in the direction of orientation. During this stage, strain induced crystallinity

occurs, increasing the preform temperature, allowing the material to anneal (Maruhashi

2001). Final burst strength properties is influence by strained induced crystallinity,

molecular orientation and wall thickness distribution (Caldicott 1999).

ECHIP

0.60

0.65

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00

Material

Recycled

80 85 90 95 100 105 110

Mould Temperature

Burst TestBlow_Time = 4.6 (s) Preform Cooling Tim = 6.0 (s) Material Order = 1

Value Low Limit High Limit 1681.54 1360.22 2002.87

MouldTem= 95.00 Material=0.960 Recycled=0.040

ECHIP

0.60

0.65

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00

Material

Recycled

80 85 90 95 100 105 110

Mould Temperature

Burst TestBlow_Time = 4.6 (s)Preform Cooling Tim = 6.0 (s)Material Order = 1

Value Low Limit High Limit 1681.54 1360.22 2002.87

MouldTem= 95.00 Material=0.960 Recycled=0.040

Page 206: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

181

7.4.3. Panel Wall thickness RPET blends were found to contribute to an increase in the beverage containers wall

thickness. Thicker mean panel thickness included RPET blends ranging from 20 – 26.7

%. These included experimental number 11, 13, 19 and 21. The least superior panel

thickness included RPET blends of 40 % for experimental 1, 2, 22 and 22R. Results

presented in figure 7.4.3-1 demonstrate no agreement with panel thickness controlled via

preform cooling times or mean preform surface temperatures (Menary et al. 2000).

Graphs to all mean panel thickness are presented in appendices S -1. Additional DoE is

necessary to gain additional knowledge of the influence on wall thickness with RPET

inclusions.

0.28

0.29

0.3

0.31

0.32

0.33

0.34

Exp # 11 Exp # 13 Exp # 19 Exp # 21

Experimental Number

Ave

rage

Pan

el T

hick

ness

(mm

)

Figure 7.4.3-1 Top 4 performing wall thickness measurements via Augmented DoE

Page 207: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

182

7.4.4. Top load strength Top load results are important mechanical properties. Results indicate top load force that

a beverage container can endure. Analysis was undertaken in Echip. Top load test

conditions are described in chapter 3.7.4.

The introduction of RPET did not indicate improvements to top load strength in isolation.

An increase in wall thickness improved top load results. Via the DoE model,

improvement in top load is enhanced with inclusion of Visy RPET 4% - SkyPET BB7755

96 % blend as demonstrated in figure 7.4.4-1. Additionally, top load improvements

incorporate a blow time of 3 seconds. An increase in preform surface temperature via the

reduction in preform cooling time (4s) is predicted. A suggested heat-set temperature of

110 oC is recommended by the DoE software.

Figure 7.4.4-1. A 2-D contour plot for top load strength versus preform cooling time

Material

Preform Cooling Time

Value Low Limit High Limit 0.497 0.436 0.558

Preform =4.00 Material=0.960 Recycled=0.040 Value Low Limit High Limit 0.497 0.436 0.558

Preform =4.00 Material=0.960 Recycled=0.040

Recycled

0.60

0.65

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00

4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0

Top Load

Mould Temperature = 110.0 oC Blow Time = 3.0 (s) Material Order = 2

Page 208: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

183

An additional constraint of 0.42 kN to top load strength as discussed on page 175 was

applied to the DoE software. This maximum constraint was considered sufficient for top

load strength application for the beverage industry.

A change in predicted process conditions are suggested by the DoE model as

demonstrated in figure 7.4.4-2. Predictive process conditions obtained from Echip DoE

suggest a decrease in mould temperature (80 oC) and an increase in blow time.

Furthermore, an increase in blend ratio of 36 % Visy RPET and 64 % SkyPET BB7755 is

suggested. These predictive improvements can be attributed to increases in nucleation

sites as a result of RPET inclusion, inturn increasing the crystallinity value of the material

(Scheirs 2003). Furthermore annealing the PET beverage container at lower blow mould

temperatures over increased blow time can increase the amorphous density of the material

(Boyd 2004; Gohil 1994; Scheirs et al. 2003).

Page 209: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

184

Figure 7.4.4-2 Top load predicted results via Echip DoE software

7.5. Mechanical Properties via Optimised DoE

7.5.1. Elastic Modulus of Panel section via

Optimised DoE Optimised DoE beverage containers for BB7755 and RPET blends where analysed for

changes in mechanical properties as a function of increased heat-set temperatures. Sample

dimensions and test conditions have been discussed in chapter 4.9.2.

The Youngs modulus (E) was constructed by drawing a tangent line where stress ( )σ is

proportional to strain ( )ε . Two points were chosen and stress was then divided by the

3.0

3.5

4.0

4.5

5.0

5.5

6.0

6.5

7.0

Blow Time

80 85 90 95 100 105 110

Mould Temperature

TopLoad x 10^-3 (N)

438

453

Preform Cooling Tim = 4.6 (s) Material = 0.640 Recycled = 0.360 Material Order = 2

Value Low Limit High Limit 0.445 0.389 0.501

Mould Temp= 80.00 Blow Time=5.00

Page 210: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

185

corresponding strain. The results are presented in figure 7.5.5-1. Equations 7.5.1-1 is

used to determine the Youngs Modulus (E) to all heat set optimised DoE experiments.

E σε

=

Equation 7.5.1-1 Where

stressstrain

σε==

An increase in elastic modulus was observed with increased heat-set temperatures from

120 – 140 oC for optimised BB7755 60 % and RPET 40 % blends. A decrease in elastic

modulus was observed at 150 oC. Previous work demonstrated similar results although a

decrease in elastic modulus is observed at higher heat-set temperatures (Gohil 1994).

This decrease is due to a decrease in the amorphous orientation, with little influence in the

decree of crystallinity. The increase in heat-set temperatures increases the degree of

relaxation within the amorphous segments (Boyd 2004). This is discussed in detail in

section 7.7.

Page 211: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

186

Figure 7.5.1-1 Tensile panel modulus results via optimised DoE heat-set conditions for BB7755 60 % - RPET 40 % blends

7.5.2. Tensile Strength of Panel section via Optimised

DoE Tensile tests were preformed for all optimised heat-set beverage containers as discussed

in chapter 5.8.1 and 5.8.2. Results are demonstrated in figure 7.5.2-1 for optimised

BB7755 60 % – RPET 40 % blend ratio. An increase in tensile properties is observed. A

linear regression line of 0.9752 is demonstrated, indicating an excellent fit to the data

presented.

Improvements in tensile properties can be attributed to the materials amorphous

orientation rather than an increase in crystallinity. The yield strength has been found to be

proportional to the amorphous orientation (Silberman et al. 1998). Furthermore, previous

studies demonstrated an increase in heat-set temperatures decrease the amorphous

orientation as measured via birefringence. The diameter of the lamellar stacks, the angle

Page 212: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

187

of the lamellae, and the applied strain located within the lamellar spacing demonstrate the

greatest influence on properties such as mechanical strength and dimensional stability.

R2 = 0.9752

100

102

104

106

108

110

112

114

116

118

120

120 130 140 150

Heat Set Temperature (oC)

Max

Yei

ld s

treng

th (M

Pa)

Figure 7.5.2-1 Maximum yield strength for optimised BB7755 60 % RPET 40 % heat-set

conditions

7.6. Dimensional Stability via Optimised DoE.

7.6.1. Process Shrinkage (S1) results The shrinkage kinetics for (S1) has been discussed in section 7.3.2. Process shrinkage

(S1) for PET containers is controlled via blow time, stretch rate, preform surface

temperature and heat-set temperature. Figure 7.6.1-2 demonstrates the effects of

Maximum yield strength compared with an increase in heat-set temperature. An increase

in heat-set temperatures increases the shrinkage kinetics to the material. This increase in

kinetic energy in the extended chain lengths enables the promotion of shrinkage kinetics

Page 213: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

188

as beverage containers are ejected from the blow mould. A notable interest is the

acceleration in the shrinkage kinetics from 140 – 150 oC of approximately 50 %.

Figure 7.6.1-1 Process shrinkage via optimised heat-set DoE for BB7755 60 % - RPET 40 % blends

Process shrinkage results for optimised Voridian CA 12 96 % – RPET 4 % blends are

presented in figure 7.6.1-2

R2 = 0.9149

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

4

4.5

120 130 140 150

Heat Set Temperature (oC)

Pro

cess

Shr

inka

ge (S

1) %

Figure 7.6.1-2 Process shrinkage data for optimised Voridian CA12 96 % – RPET 4% blend

Page 214: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

189

7.6.2. Hot-fill Shrinkage (S2) results Axial stretch speeds were calculated with assumptions made for stretch rod axial

movement of 88 mm / 0.5 seconds. This measurement was obtained via the

measurement of bottle length less the preform axial length. Time used for stretch rod

start to finish time (extension of the stretch rod during axial stretch direction) is

approximated for empirical use.

This approximation calculates a stretch speed of 21.12 m / min. This increase in

stretch speeds increases preform surface temperatures during the stretching process.

Stretch speeds above 20 m /min increases the thermal stability via relaxation of

amorphous segments. (Maruhashi et al. 1996). However in this study, stretch speeds

were not altered, therefore hot-fill shrinkage was analysed for DoE beverage

containers as a function of heat-set temperatures.

Much of the discussion in chapter 7 has clearly demonstrated increases in preform

temperatures yield improved thermal stability at elevated temperatures. The maximum

amount of crystallinity observed via stretch speed, – that is increases in preform

temperature via strain induced crystallisation – is 35 % (Boyd 2004). This result does

not include post heat-setting. However the belief that increased crystallinity via

increased heat-setting temperatures yields improved thermal stability has been

previously discussed in section 7.3.1.

This research study demonstrated the lest amount of S2 shrinkage incorporating low

heat-set temperatures (80 – 110 oC) – a result of 2.295 % – recorded for experiment

15. Comparisons to results obtained via optimised DoE BB7755 60 % – RPET 40 %

Page 215: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

190

blends demonstrate superior thermal stability when compared to experimental 15 at

heat-set temperatures above 150 oC. This result implies experimental number 15

incorporates sufficient strain induced crystallinity during axial stretching. The kinetics

of strain induced crystallinity produce imperfect crystal domains during stretching

(Greener et al. 1999). These imperfections are removed during inflation in the blow

moulds, increasing the density of the crystallites and changes in morphology whilst

incorporating 95 oC heat-set temperatures for a blow time of 3 seconds. It is

important to note heat-set temperatures from 120 – 140 oC do not yield superior hot-

fill (S2) results demonstrated when comparisons are made to experiment 15.

R2 = 0.9532

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

4

4.5

120 130 140 150

Heat-set Temperature (oC)

Hot

-fill

Shr

inka

ge (S

2)%

Figure 7.6.2-1 Optimised BB7755 60 % – RPET 40 % DoE results for hot-fill

shrinkage.

Hot-fill shrinkage (S2) is observed to decrease as heat-set temperatures increases

(figure 7.6.2-1). This increase in heat-set temperature has a two-fold effect.

Crystallisation is able to continue during the inflation process. As mentioned

previously, crystallisation occurs during axial stretching of the preform. The process

Page 216: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

191

of strain induced crystallisation increases the level of applied stress in the amorphous

region during orientation. The temperature generation during axial stretch of the

preform is extremely important in the amount of residual stress applied.

During the inflation process, crystallisation is further promoted as the preform is

blown against a blow mould at elevated temperatures (Boyd 2004). This is important

as inflation of the preform against a cold mould generates frozen in stress, suppressing

crystallisation.

Secondly, as discussed above, applied stresses are present in the amorphous region as

a result of axial stretching of the preform. During inflation of the preform, heated

blow moulds promotes annealing within the amorphous region, in particular the tie

chain segments (Jabarin 1996; Zachmann 1979). This mechanism of annealing

increases crystallites population and size. Growth of crystallites lock the oriented

polymer chains in place. As the PET beverage containers come into contact with

fluids at elevated temperatures, the molecules are constrained and not free to move

(Jabarin 1996). This mechanism is useful in allowing the material to de-stress within

the amorphous segments (Boyd 2004).

Results for optimised Voridian CA12 – RPET blends demonstrate a decrease in hot-

fill (S2) shrinkage as a function of heat-set temperature. However, comparisons made

to experimental number 15 demonstrated superior hot-fill shrinkage; although burst

test results are not as favoured when compared to the optimised data set.

Page 217: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

192

R2 = 0.9615

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

120 130 140 150

Heat-set Temperature (oC)

Hot

-fill

Shrin

kage

(S2)

%

Figure 7.6.2-2 Optimised CA12 96 % – RPET 4 % DoE results for hot-fill shrinkage.

7.6.3. Burst test results via optimised DoE Burst test analysis was undertaken for all optimised DoE samples. Best results for burst

test results are observed for SkyPET BB7755 60 % – RPET 40 % optimised blends. Burst

test results presented in figure 7.6.3-1 range between 1125 – 1160 kPa. A similar trend

appears for optimised Voridian CA 12 - RPET blends, with strength between 1400 – 1440

kPa. There does not appear to indicate a trend to either data set for improved burst test via

heat-set temperatures. The results indicate the presences of RPET as the main determinate

in burst test results.

Page 218: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

193

1100

1110

1120

1130

1140

1150

1160

1170

1180

120 130 140 150

Heat-set Temperature (oC)

Bur

st P

ress

ure

(Kpa

)

Figure 7.6.3-1 Burst strength results for optimised BB7755 60 % – RPET 40 % blends

Comparisons to the predictive burst strength results obtained from Echip DoE for

optimised Voridian CA12 – RPET blends recorded a 40 - 80 kPa increase above the

predicted Trade Off prediction. ISBM process parameters are presented in chapter 5.8.1.

Results for Trade off Goal Seek optimised SkyPET BB7755 – RPET blends were

approximately on average 91 kPa above the value predicted in Figure 7.6.3-3.

1360

1380

1400

1420

1440

1460

1480

1500

120 130 140 150Heat-set Temperature (oC)

Bur

st P

ress

ure

(Kpa

)

Figure 7.6.3-2 Burst strength results for optimised CA 12 96 % – RPET 4% blends

Page 219: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

194

Figure 7.6.3-3 A 2-D contour plot for constrained optimised BB7755 – RPET material blend for heat-set conditions

7.7. Thermal Analysis. TMDSC thermal analyses were conducted as discussed in chapter 3.6.1. Heat-set

validations via optimised BB7755 – RPET blends are presented in this chapter. Thermal

characterisations include observations to Tg and percentage crystallinity ( cχ ) as a

function of heat-set.

7.7.1. Glass transition temperature via TMDSC TMDSC is used to characterise the kinetic behaviour underlying the glass transition

temperature (Boiler et al. 1996), and its influence on free volume due to changes in

thermal history (Painter et al. 1994). TMDSC studies for all raw materials presented in

Material

Mould Temperature

Recycled

ECHIP

0.60

0.65

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00

80 85 90 95 100 105 110

Burst Test

Blow Time = 7.0 (s) Preform Cooling Time = 4.5 (s) Material Order = 2

Value Low Limit High Limit 1054.44 735.54

1373.34MouldTem= 80.00 Material=0.600 Recycled=0.400Value Low Limit High Limit 1054.44 1373.34

Mould Temp= 80.00 Material=0.600 Recycled=0.400

735.54

Page 220: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

195

figure 7.7.1-1 show RPET has the lowest Tg in first and second heating. This recyclate

material requires less energy to melt the crystals, as certified via the ( )gJH totalm /,Δ

results. This is characterised by the low wM for RPET.

Table 7.7.1-1 Thermal analysis results obtained from TMDSC for all PET raw materials

First Heating Run Total CA12 BB7755 RPET

Tg Cp (°C) heating 76.45 (I) 78.61 (I) 72.06 (I)

Tcc (°C) 116.26 °C 109.69 °C 114.68 °C

ccHΔ (J/g) 22.69 (J/g) 35.77 (J/g) 42.79(J/g)

Tm (°C) 250.05 °C 257.59 °C 253.36 °C

totalmH ,Δ (J/g) 42.10 (J/g) 51.14 (J/g) 58.00 (J/g)

χ % 14.38 11.39 11.27

2nd Run Total

Tm (°C) 250.72 °C 258.21 °C 248.40 °C

( )gJH totalm /,Δ 70.91 (J/g) 64.32 (J/g) 55.33 (J/g)

Tg Cp Rev (°C) heating 78.89 (I) 82.02 (I) 78.20 (I)

Initial χ % 58.44 47.64 40.99

The first heating run was used to remove any thermal history obtained via the extrusion

process. Upon removal of previous thermal history, analysis during the second heating

and cooling run was conducted. The glass transition temperature Tg was established via

the reversing heat capacity ( ρC ) curve measured at the inflection point. This method was

applied as any changes in the ρC as a function of heating rate can be observed within the

Tg region.

Page 221: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

196

Table 7.7.1-2 Thermal analysis summary results table for optimised heat-set 60 percent BB7755 – 40 percent RPET blend.

Heat-set temperatures 120 oC 130 oC 140 oC 150 oC Tg Cp (°C) 1St heating

MDSC 89.56 (T) 92.47 (T) 89.92 (T) 93.66 (T)

Tg d (Cp/dT) MDSC 88.89 92.00 88.12 89.71 ( ))/ gJH NRΔ 15.70 18.59 20.59 13.41 ( )gJH totalm /,Δ 50.48 50.31 51.38 49.19

( ))/ gJH RΔ 13.97 13.29 19.73 18.24

Tm (°C) 255.55 255.66 256.47 255.95 Initial χ % 25.76 23.50 22.81 26.50

In both optimised DoE cases, Tg values are recorded above the original Tg presented in

table 7.7.1-1. Values for Tg were performed incorporating MDSC, via the tangent line and

derivative heat capacity curve. Although an increase is observed, this did not translate

into a linear increase in Tg as a function of increased heat-set temperatures Previous

studies for injection moulding of RPET blends observed a decrease in Tg at high addition

levels. This is attributed to decreases in ductility, resulting in a decrease in crystallinity

(Fann et al. 1996). Thermal analysis results for optimised DoE are presented in table

7.7.1-2 and 7.7.1-3.

Table 7.7.1-3 Thermal analysis data for 96 % CA12 – 4 % RPET Optimised DoE beverage containers

Heat-set temperatures 120 oC 130 oC 140 oC 150 oC

Tg Cp (°C) 1St heating 83.17 (T) 83.00 (T) 88.32 (T) 87.60 (T)

Tg d (Cp/dT) 81.33 82.36 88.37 87.75 ( )gJH NR /Δ 6.809 3.734 14.78 9.555 ( )gJH totalm /,Δ 39.36 45.38 48.31 41.45

( )gJH R /Δ 32.55 41.60 33.54 31.94

Tm (°C) 250.52 250.35 250.40 250.61 Initial χ % 24.11 30.85 24.83 23.62

Page 222: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

197

A decrease in the free volume due to thermal history – that is an increase in heat-set

temperatures – does not demonstrate an increase in Tg, a precursor for increased

crystallinity with increasing heat-set (Boyd 2004). Free volume is best understood as the

occupied and unoccupied volume in the material (Chuynoweth 1989). It has been

demonstrated an increase in crystallinity can raise the Tg of materials (Painter et al. 1994).

However proper interpretation of the data suggests the percentage crystallinity χ % did

not raise linearly with increased heat-set temperatures.

88

88.5

89

89.5

90

90.5

91

91.5

92

92.5

120 130 140 150

Heat-set Temperature (oC)

Tg V

alue

s (o C

)

Tg d(Cp/dT)

Figure 7.7.1-1 Glass transition results as a function of heat-set temperature via derivative ρC curve.

Thermal stability of materials is better comprehended by means of enthalpic relaxation in

the amorphous regions as discussed previously. Due to the competing mechanics to

improve thermal stability at elevated temperatures, the influence of RPET to increase the

Page 223: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

198

Tg values was difficult to interpret. Further studies are required to address this question in

full.

7.7.2. Percentage Crystallinity via Optimised DoE.

Percentage crystallinity did not demonstrate to be the dominant factor when considering

thermal stability. It is clear the ability to anneal (relieve stress) via heat treatment

encourages molecular relaxation increasing molecular mobility in the amorphous region

(Matthews et al. 2000; Venkateswaran et al. 1998).

Crystallinity results presented in table 7.7.1-2 via TMDSC analysis demonstrated

decreases in percentage crystallinity ( χ %) while increasing heat-set temperatures. An

increase is observed at heat-set temperature of 150 oC. One suggested reason is due to the

strain induced crystallisation influence prior to inflation. As mentioned in preceding

chapters, stretch speed during axial deformation increases the temperature of the preform.

This increased orientation increases preform temperature, which yields greater relaxed

amorphous segments.

Heat-set results for 150 oC can be explained in the following way. Preform temperatures

are lower than the applied heat-set temperature in the blow mould. During the heat-setting

process, the amorphous region undergoes further molecular relaxation due to high mould

temperatures when in contact at the surface of the preform. This process decreases the

free volume of the material. This is quantified by an increase in Tg, demonstrating an

increase in χ %. The final χ % is influence via stretch speed, strain rate, extension rate,

Page 224: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

199

preform temperature, material properties and the influence in molecular relaxation of the

non-crystalline region (Boyd 2004).

7.8. Density results via Optimised DoE Results presented in section 7.7.1 did not show χ % (via DSC analysis) to increase

linearly with increasing heat set temperatures. The current literature suggests increases

the percentage crystallinity χ % is dependant on heat-set temperatures (Mc Chesney et al.

1983). This thesis did not reproduce similar results. Therefore, additional studies

concerning the Volume fraction crystallinity ( cV ) and calculate χ %. The analysis sort to

address the influence in amorphous morphology and its ability to demonstrate the DoE

experimental data set superior thermal stability properties.

Density measurements (see section 6.4) were conducted and results analysed. Density

measurements were used to extrapolate crystallinity measurements expressed in equation

7.8-1;

ac

acV

ρρρρ

−−

=

Equation 7.8-1

Where

cV = Volume fraction crystallinity

aρ = amorphous density

cρ = theoretical 100 % crystalline density of PET

ρ = density of the sample

Page 225: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

200

Values used for 100 % amorphous density and 100 % crystalline density for equation 7.8-

1 include 1.333 and 1.455 g/cc respectively (Jabarin 1996). Much discussion concerning

the accuracy of crystallinity has been published (Bashir et al. 2000). The density

measurement method is not without errors. In this case for oriented PET beverage

container samples, equation 7.8-1 may overestimate crystallinity results. This is due to the

two-phase model which assumes a constant amorphous and crystalline structure (Bashir

et al. 2000; Boyd 2004; Farrow et al. 1960; Segerman et al. 1966).

Secondly, equation 7.8-1 assumes a constant amorphous density. However, amorphous

densities vary with changes in heat-set temperatures (Liu et al. 2004). PET beverage

containers do not yield as high an orientation when compared to highly oriented PET

samples. Therefore small changes in amorphous densities are observed. Due to small

variation in orientation, small errors in amorphous density measurement results is

possible (Boyd 2004). Due to the above, cV measurements is a good approximation and

is used to determine amorphous density changes as a function of heat-set temperature

(Greener et al. 1999).

Localised density measurements were conducted as described in chapter 4.10. The section

chosen for analysis were the same location taken to conduct DSC analysis. Results were

converted to g/cm 3 and presented in figure 7.8-1. The results did not show a linear

increase in χ % values as a function of heat set. Temperatures above 135 oC to 150 oC

show an increase in χ %.

Due to the nature of measuring localised density values, which does note reflect the entire

panel density, additional analysis was undertaken. Density measurement results found

Page 226: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

201

similar trends obtained via MDSC crystallinity measurements presented in table 7.7.2-1.

Previous studies have observed alterations in amorphous gauche conformations due to

increased heat-set temperatures (Natu et al. 2005).

1.34

1.342

1.344

1.346

1.348

1.35

1.352

1.354

1.356

1.358

1.36

120 130 140 150Heat-set Temperature (oC)

Den

sity

(g/c

m3 )

Density Local Point

Figure 7.8-1 Localised density measurements for optimised BB7755 60 % – RPET 40 % blends

The study was seeking an average density value of the panel, which may have been used

to explain the improved thermal stability at elevated temperatures. Density measurements

for the entire panel area were undertaken as previously described in section 4.11. Results

were expressed as g/cm3. Volumetric fraction crystallinity (Vc) were derived via equation

7.8-1. Results are presented in figure 7.8-2. An increase in the volume fraction density is

demonstrated via an increase in heat-set temperature.

Observable changes in crystallinity are seen at heat-set temperatures between 130 – 150

oC in figure 7.8-2. An increase in density is observed; the amorphous gauche

Page 227: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

202

conformation decreases. At high levels of crystallinity, the amorphous trans

conformations remains relatively unchanged (Natu et al. 2005).

R2 = 0.885

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

120 130 140 150Heat-set Temperature (oC)

Per

cent

age

crys

talli

nity

(%)

Figure 7.8-2 Density measurements for entire panel section for Optimise BB7755 60 % – RPET 40 % blend DoE

Therefore it is surmised an increase in amorphous density is observed (Liu et al. 2004).

This increase in amorphous density is attributed to improvements in the beverage

container thermal stability at elevated temperatures. Heat-setting from 120 – 150 oC

encourages additional enthalpic relaxation, hence improving the thermal stability of the

beverage container.

7.9. DMTA Analysis DMTA analysis indicated increases in Tg values validating TMDSC results as measured

from the panel side wall. Changes in the amorphous density as measured in DMTA

compare ( )δtan , Tg via rev ρC and Tg via d ( ρC /dT) in figure 7.9-2. In all cases, the

Page 228: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

203

changes in Tg results follow similar patterns found in TMDSC results. Tan delta results

are presented in figure 7.9-1.

0

0.05

0.1

0.15

0.2

0.25

30 80 130 180Temperature (oC)

Tan

delta

Figure 7.9-1 Tan delta results via DMTA for optimised BB7755 60 % – RPET 40 % blends

The tabulated results did not show an increase in Tg, with increased heat-set temperatures.

The peak height observed via figure 7.9-1 does not demonstrate suppression and shift in

peak position as demonstrated in previous studies. (Greener et al. 1999). Due to the

influence from strain induced crystallinity, and preform surface temperature, the effects

from heat-setting is minimised. The preform temperature is high; having a greater effect

on the amorphous density improving the thermal stability of the PET beverage container.

@ 120 OC

@ 130 OC

@ 140 OC

@ 150 OC

Page 229: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

204

86

88

90

92

94

96

98

120 130 140 150Heat-set Temperature

Tg (o C

)

Figure 7.9-2 Comparison to glass transition temperatures via DMTA and TMDSC

7.10. Orientation assessment via SAXS SAXS measurements were preformed as discussed in chapter 6.7. Data obtained via

SAXS performed a 2D subtraction. SAXS measurements did not observed crystalline

rearrangement due to heat-set temperature for optimised BB7755 – RPET blends. With

increases in heat treatment, the samples were almost isotropic with little preferred

orientation visible. This result indicated the influence on thermal stability for optimised

BB7755 – RPET containers incurred greater influence from the temperature of the

preform. As preform surface temperatures were extreme, the influence of heat-set

temperatures is minimised, except at notably higher temperatures.

Increases in heat-set temperatures have demonstrated improvements in aligned crystallites

and crystallite growth. This phenomenon is said to influence the growth in the number of

tie chains as a function of heat-set temperatures (Greener et al. 1999). The long spacing

(L) measured in previous SAXS studies decline with increased heat-set temperatures until

180 oC. Further studies need to be conducted to obtained clarity to orientation changes

Tan Delta

Tg Cp

Tg d (Cp/dT)

Page 230: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 7 Results and Discussions

205

due to increases in heat-set temperatures. SAXS diffraction patterns are found in

appendices M – 1 to M – 4.

Page 231: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 8 Conclusion and recommendation for further research work

206

8. Chapter 8. Conclusion and recommendation for

further research work

Page 232: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 8 Conclusion and recommendation for further research work

207

8.1. Conclusions

8.1.1. Critical factors controlling thermal stability Thermal stability for beverage applications is important for the hot-fill process. The

literature survey established conclusively heat-set beverage containers are able to

demonstrate superior dimensional stability. The there is a current argument for possible

improvement to thermal stability is via increased crystallinity properties. Present research

demonstrates other factors other than crystallinity enhances of beverage containers

thermal stability at elevated temperatures.

Morphological factors controlling thermal stability include changes in morphological

structure within the amorphous and crystalline region. This study observed preform

surface temperature to be an important parameter when considering dimensional stability

during the hot-fill process. Furthermore, strain induced crystallisation during axial

stretching is considered to influence the final hot-fill shrinkage results. In this study,

improvements in thermal stability is attributed to the mean preform surface time. This

was controlled via preform cooling time as measured via FLIR camera recorded 113 oC to

be considered optimum. Conversely, mean preform surface temperature for the same

locations recording 106 oC demonstrated the poorest final hot-fill shrinkage results.

The inclusion of RPET and its influence on nucleation within homopolymer SkyPET

BB7755 have influenced the final hot-fill shrinkage properties. Residual Antimony (Sb3)

catalyst are equally important in assisting in uniformed perform temperature prior to

inflation to ensure thermal stability. In this research, the heat-set temperature did not

Page 233: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 8 Conclusion and recommendation for further research work

208

seem to be a dominant factor in improving thermal stability at elevated temperatures.

Blow time in concert with preform cooling time assist in thermal stability.

It is difficult to predict precisely the morphological structure in this research, as it

requires numerous methods to quantify changes in the amorphous phase. Volumetric

fraction crystallinity measurements illustrate changes present in the amorphous region

due to increases in heat-set temperatures. However quantifying the morphological

changes required additional investigation.

The current research did not observed an increase in percentage crystallinity as a function

of increased heat-set temperatures as measured via TMDSC. An observed increase in

volumetric fraction crystallinity was observed via density measurements of the PET

beverage container panel section via optimised heat-set conditions.

8.1.2. Optimum process conditions for Single

Stage ISBM Acceptable thermal stability was achieved; however optimised process conditions are

essential to increase the level of RPET use. Optimised virgin and RPET blends are

suggested by the DoE model. The first includes Voridian CA 12 (96 %) - Visy RPET

(4%) blend. The inclusion of RPET blends observed increases the thermal stability of the

beverage container.

The results obtained via the first optimised condition were poor. An increase in process

shrinkage (S1) was observed, with the poorest value above 1 %. This is not an accepted

value for industry standards; the container is considered non-conforming. Process

Page 234: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 8 Conclusion and recommendation for further research work

209

conditions for optimised Voridian CA12 – RPET blends included preform cooling time of

6 seconds. A decrease in preform surface temperature is the result. A predicted hot-fill

(S2) values of 2.86 is suggested. Final shrinkage result at 150 oC recorded 3.70 %.

The second optimised BB7755 – RPET blend demonstrated improved thermal stability

above 140 oC heat-set temperatures. A reduction in preform cooling time (4.5 seconds), a

blow time of 7 seconds and material formulation of SkyPET BB7755 (60 %) - Visy

RPET (40 %) is suggested. Improved hot-fill shrinkage results are observed when

compared to experimental # 15 augmented DoE shrinkage results. A predicted hot-fill

shrinkage result via the second optimised DoE of 0.95 % is suggested. A final hot-fill

shrinkage result of 1.41 % is observed at 150 oC.

Improved thermal stability incorporating a ribless, panelless CSD, non heat-set beverage

container is possible with lower heat-set temperatures. Controlled process shrinkage (S1)

within 0.2 percent is validated. Hot-fill shrinkage of 2.29 percent is possible incorporating

heat-set temperature of 95 oC. Process conditions of 3 seconds blow time and 4 seconds

blow time including homopolymer 100 % virgin SkyPET BB7755 yielded best results.

Proper preform design utilising optimised process conditions can produce beverage

containers incorporating less energy with increased cycle times.

8.1.3. Thermal stability and material integrity via

RPET inclusion The addition of RPET influences the mechanical properties of PET beverage containers.

Via augmented DoE, an increase in thermal properties is demonstrated by way of 100

Page 235: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 8 Conclusion and recommendation for further research work

210

percent virgin SkyPET BB7755. Furthermore, controlled inclusion of Visy RPET

enhances thermal stability. An improvement in thermal stability is characterised by

(NaOH) in RPET. The sodium salts combine with end chain groups, initiating

heterogeneous nucleation.

Increased heat-set temperatures increase the glass transition temperature to all materials

used in this study. Hence, it can be deduced that an increase in the amorphous density is

expected. An increase in glass transition temperature is observed as compared to the

materials original glass transition temperature. However, this rise does not increase

linearly with increasing heat-set temperatures.

Process conditions however influence the final hot-fill shrinkage results. The final DoE

was complex; the inclusion of many design variables and its affects from RPET blends

via glass transitions temperature was difficult to interpret. The relationship between

thermal stability and an increase in percentage crystallinity was not established.

The inclusion of RPET blends observed a decrease in the beverage containers ductile

property. A reduction in the elastic properties is attributed to a reduction in preform

surface temperature and RPET blend inclusion. Average preform surface temperatures of

106.00 oC is demonstrated for the top 7 performing burst strength results. A preform

cooling time range of 5 – 6 seconds is recorded. An increase in RPET blends increases

the rigidity of the beverage container. This is turn decreases the chain mobility of the

molecules. Hence superior burst strength results include 100 percent virgin PET material.

Page 236: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 8 Conclusion and recommendation for further research work

211

8.2. Recommendations for Further Work a) Construct a DoE placing static constraints on preform cooling time. This includes the

evaluation of one material for analysis in separate DoE. This will provide increase

resolution when incorporating RPET and virgin RPET blends for acceptable thermal

stability at elevated temperatures

b) Perform DoE in Partial Cubic mode. This will increase the resolution required to

improve the ISBM optimisation process for the production of increased levels of PET

– RPET blends to gain additional knowledge for improved thermal stability at

elevated temperatures.

c) Perform Birefringence measurements via Fourier transform infrared (FTIR)

spectroscopy determining end group analysis via the inclusion of RPET. Additional

measurements of conformational changes to amorphous trans and gauche changes as a

function of heat-set temperature with RPET inclusion.

d) Undertake a more comprehensive SAXS measurement study in hoop and axial

direction, measuring changes in crystalline orientation as a function of RPET

inclusion and its influence in preform surface temperature.

e) Include a more detailed morphological analysis of the influence of RPET for thermal

stability at elevated temperatures. This includes NMR studies to evaluate detailed

microstructure of the polymer and determine end group analysis and the number of

end groups due to influence of NaOH with PET blends. A detailed analysis to the

Page 237: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Chapter 8 Conclusion and recommendation for further research work

212

materials molecular structure, in particular the non crystalline region will contribute

additional knowledge to the scientific community.

f) The knowledge gained in this research study provides scientifically optimised ISBM

conditions for inclusion of RPET at increase levels to improved thermal stability at

elevated temperatures.

g) Other than the above mentioned, the existing research also provides additional

knowledge in modifying non heat-set containers into a workable heat-set instrument,

assisting in improving the thermal stability to a PET beverage container for hot-fill

applications.

Page 238: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

References

213

References

Ajmera, P. (1989). Heat Set Method for Oval Containers. US, Owens-Illinois Plastic

Products Inc. US 4,883,631.

Akiho, O. (1989). Container Having Collapse Panels with Longitudinally Extending Ribs.

Japan, Yoshino Kogyosho Co., Ltd. US 4,805,788.

Awaja, F., F. Daver, et al. (2004). "Recycled Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate) Chain

Extension by a Reactive Extrusion Process." Polymer Engineering and Science

44(8): 1579-1587.

Baird, D. G. and D. I. Collias (1998). Polymer Processing : Principles and Design,Wiley,

New York.

Barth, H. G. and J. W. Mays (1991). Modern Methods of Polymer Characterization,

Wiley, New York.

Bashir Z, Aloush AL, et al. (2000). "Evaluation of Three Methods for the Measurement

of Crystallinity of Pet Resin, Preforms and Bottles." Polymer Engineering and

Science 40(11): 2442 - 2455.

Bashir, Z., A. Aloush, et al. (2000). "Evaluation of Three Methods for the Measurement

of Crystallinity of Pet Resin, Preforms and Bottles." Polymer Engineering and

Science 40(11): 2442 - 2455.

Baxter, F. and V. Lenihan. (2003). National Plastics Recycling Survey 2003: Polymer Re-

Use and Capability Report. J. Nolan. Melbourne, Plastics and Chemicals

Industries Association 2003 and Nolan-ITU Pty Ltd 200: 1 - 29.

Bertelli, C. (2005). Recycling Pet:Bottle to Bottle Process Application Bottle Application.

Polyester 2005 10th World Congress., The Netherlands Amsterdam.

Betsch, R. (2000). Experimentation by Design. A tool to achieve maximum results with

minimum resources, Echip Incorporated. 2000.

Billmeyer, F. W. (1984). Morphology and Order in Crystalline Polymers. Textbook of

Polymer Science. New York, Wiley: xviii, 578 p.

Biron, M. (2004). Packaging Likes Polymers Iii – Bottles and Other Blow-Moulded

Containers and Items, WWW.Omnexus.com. 2006.

Blaine, R. L. (2004). The Case for a Generic Definition of Differential Scanning

Calorimetry. TA Instruments, Inc.

Page 239: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

References

214

Blaine, R. L. and L. E. Waguespack (2004). Determination of Polymer Molecular Weight

Distribution by Dsc, TA Instruments Inc: 1 - 6.

Blundella, D. J., A. Mahendrasingam, et al. (1999). "Orientation Prior to Crystallisation

During Drawing of Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate)." Polymer 41: 7793–7802.

Boiler, A., I. Okazaki, et al. (1996). "Modulated Differential Scanning Calorimetry in the

Glass Transition Region. Part Iii. Evaluation of Polystyrene and Poly(Ethylene

Tetrephthalate)." Thermochimica Acta 284: 1-19.

Boyd, T. and K. Silvers (2002a). Plastics Container Having Geometry Minimizing

Spherulitic Crystallization Below the Finish and Method. US, Schmalbach-

Lubeca. US 6,413,466 B1.

Boyd, T., K. Silvers, et al. (2002b). Blow Moulding Method for Producing Pasteurization

Containers. US, Schmalbach - Lubeca AG. US 6,484,670.

Boyd, T. J. (2004). Transient Crystallization of Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate) Bottles.

Chemical Engineering, The University of Toledo. PhD.

Brooks, D. W. (2000). Types of Plastic Materials, Barrier Properties and Applications.

Pet Packaging Technology. Sheffield, England, Sheffield Academic Press: 17 -

18.

Brostow, W. and R. D. Corneliussen (1986). Failure of Plastics,Hanser, Munich.

Buehler, F. U., C. J. Martin, et al. (1998). "Temperature Modulated Differential Scanning

Calorimetry through Heat Diffusion Analysis." Journal of Thermal Analysis 54:

501 - 519.

Buehrig, L. (2000). Heat-Set Analysis, Eastman Kodak: Comparison of varying Heat-set

PET grade materials for two stage ISBM process.

Caldicott, R. J. (1998). Fundamentals of Pet Stretch Blow Molded Containers. ANTEC.

Caldicott, R. J. (1999). The Basics of Stretch Blow Molding Pet Containers. Bridging the

Millennia, New York, Society of Plastics Engineers.

Cassel, B. and B. Twombly (1998). "Determination of Initial Crystallinity of

Polyethylene Terephthalate Using Dsc and the Extrapolated Enthalpy Technique."

ANTEC.

Cha, C. (1964). "Tritium Exchange Studies on Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate)." Polymer

Letters 2: 1069 - 1073.

Charbonneau, L. and R. Johnson (2000). Polyester Container and Method for Making

Same. US, HNA Holdings, Inc. US 6,063,465.

Page 240: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

References

215

Charbonneau LF, J. R. (2000). Polyester Container and Method for Making Same. US,

HNA Holdings, Inc.

Cheng, P. N. (2004). Optimisation of Injection Stretch Blow Moulding by Response

Surface Methodology. School of Mechanical and Manufacturing Engineering.

Melbourne, Royal Melbourne Institute of Technology. Masters 152.

Cheremisinoff, N. P. (1996). "Polymer Characterization : Laboratory Techniques and

Analysis." from http://buddy2.lib.unimelb.edu.au/cgi-in/buddyrun.cgi/NET/10926

Connect (University of Melbourne only)

Chuah H., Lin-Vien D, et al. (2001). "Poly(Trimethylene Terephthalate) Molecular

Weight and Mark - Houwink Equation." Polymer 42: 7137-7139.

Chung, C. I. (2000a). Extrusion of Polymers : Theory and Practice,Hanser Gardner

Publications, Munich Cincinnati.

Chung, C. I. (2000b). Fundermentals of Polymers. Extrusion of Polymers :. Munich

Cincinnati, Hanser Gardner Publications: xiv, 369 p.

Chung, C. I. (2000c). Fundermentals of Polymers. Extrusion of Polymers : Theory and

Practice. Munich, Cincinnati, Hanser Publishers ; Hanser Gardner Publications

[distributor]: 51-167.

Chuynoweth, K. (1989). Glass Transition and Crystallisation. Polymer Update : Science

and Engineering. W. D. Cook and G. B. Guise. Parkville, Vic., Polymer Division,

Royal Australian Chemical Institute: xx, 285 p.

Collette, W., S. Krishnakumar, et al. (1989). Hot Fill Containers. US, Continental PET

Tecnologies, Inc. US,4,863,046.

Crawford, R. J. (1998). Plastics Engineering. 3rd,Butterworth-Heinemann, Boston.

Cser, F. (2007). Tg Determination and Intergration Limits for Pet Samples, Personal

Communications.

Cser, F., F. Rasoul, et al. (1997). "Modulated Differential Scanning Calorimetry." Journal

of Thermal Analysis and Calorimetry, 50(5): 727 - 744.

Cser, F., F. Rasoul, et al. (1998). "Reversible Melting of Semi Crystalline Polymers:

Frequency Dependence on the Melting Enthalpy." Journal of Thermal Analysis

52: 293 - 313.

Danley., R. I. (2003). Differential Scanning Calorimeter. US, TA Instruments - Waters

LLC.

Page 241: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

References

216

Daver, F., R. Gupta, et al. (2007). "Rheological Characterisation of Recycled Poly

(Ethylene Terephthalate) Modified by Reactive Extrusion." Journal of Materials

Processing Tech.

Duh, B. (1980). Method for Production of High Molecular Weight Polyester with Low

Catalyst Level and Low Corboxyl Content. US, The Goodyear Tire and Rubber

Company. US 4,205,157.

Duh, B. (2001). "Reaction Kinetics for Solid - State Polymerization of Poly(Ethylene

Terephthalate)." Journal of Applied Polymer Science 81(7): 811748-1761.

Duh, B. (2002). "Effects of the Carboxyl Concentration on the Solid-State Polymerization

of Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate)." Journal of Applied Polymer Science 83: 1288–

1304.

Dupont (2003). Synthesis of PEIT, Internal Publication.

Dvorak, R., P. Lovenitti, et al. (2000). Increasing the Process Efficiency of Recycling

Post - Consumer Plastic Bottles Via Sorting Processes. Profiles in Industrial

Research. Toncich D. Hawthorn, Australia, Swinburne University of Technology.

Eastman Chemicals (2003). CA12. B. Elliot, Internal Publication.

Fakirov S (1997). Polyethylene Terephthalate. Handbook of Thermoplastics. D. Hudgin.

New York, Marcel Dekker: 449-464.

Fann, D. W., S. K. Huang, et al. (1996). "Kinetics and Thermal Crystallinity of Recycled

Pet. 1. Dynamic Cooling Crystallization Studies on Blends Recycled with

Engineering Pet." Journal of Applied Polymer Science 61: 1375 - 1385.

Farrow, G. and I. M. Ward (1960). "Crystallinity in Poly (Ethylene Terephthalate): A

Comparison of X-Ray, Infra-Red and Density Measurements." Polymer 1: 330-

339.

Gaspar-Rosas, A. (2004). Rheology Seminar. IRIS, Australia.

Gaydosh, K., R. Steih, et al. (2000). Hot Fill Containers with Improved Top Load

Capabilites. Germany, Schmalbach-Lubeca. US6,016,932.

Gohil, R. M. (1993a). "Morphology-Permeability Relationships in Biaxially Oriented Pet

Films: A Relationship between Oxygen Permeability and Prof." Journal of

Applied Polymer Science 48(9): 1649-1664.

Gohil, R. M. (1993b). "Morphology-Property Relationships in Oriented Pet Films: A Role

of in-Plane Crystalline Orientation Distribution on the Film Properties." Journal of

Applied Polymer Science 48(9): 1635-1648.

Page 242: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

References

217

Gohil, R. M. (1994). "Morphology-Property Relationship in Oriented Pet Films:

Microstructural Reorganization During Heat Treatment." Journal of Applied

Polymer Science 52(7): 925-944.

Göltner, W. (2004). Relationship between Polyester Quality and Processability: Hands-on

Experience. Modern Polyesters: Chemistry and Technology of Polyesters and

Copolyesters. T. E. L. John Scheirs: 435-493.

Greener, J., A. H. Tsou, et al. (1999). "Physical and Microstructural Effects of Heat

Setting in Polyester Films." Polymer Engineering & Science 39(12): 2403-2418.

Groeninckx, G. and H. Reynaers (1980a). "Morphology and Melting Behavior of

Semicrystalline Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate). Ii. Annealed Pet." Journal of

Polymer Science: Polymer Physics Edition 18(6): 1325-1341.

Groeninckx, G., H. Reynaers, et al. (1980b). "Morphology and Melting Behavior of

Semicrystalline Poly(Ethy1ene Terephthalate). I. Isothermally Crystallized Pet."

Journal of Polymer Science: 18: 1311-1324.

Grulke, E. A., J. Brandrup, et al. (1999). Polymer Handbook. 4th,Wiley, New York.

Gruver, V., D. Showers, et al. (2000). "The Determination of Pet Crystallinity by

Different Analytical Techniques." ANTEC.

Hanley, T., D. Sutton, et al. (2006). "Molecular Morphology of Petaloid Bases of Pet

Bottles: A Small-Angle X-Ray Scattering Study." Journal of Applied Polymer

Science 99(6): 3328-3335.

Hergenrother, W. and C. Nelson (1974). "Viscosity-Molecular Weight Relationship for

Fractionated Poly (Ethylene Terephthalate)." JOURNAL OF POLYMER

SCIENCE: 12: 2905-2915.

Jabarin, S. (1984). Polyethylene Terephthalate Articles and Method. US, Owens Illinios,

Inc. US 4,476,170.

Jabarin, S. (1992). "Strain-Induced Crystallization of Poly(Ethyleneterephthalate)."

Polymer Engineering & Science 18(32): 1341.

Jabarin, S. (1995). Crystallisation and Thermal Stabilisation of Heat Set Petp. 11th

Annual High Performance Blow Molding Conference: Technical Innovations in

Blow Molding. Retec Proceedings, Cleveland, Oh., Society of Plastic Engineers.

Jabarin, S. (1996). Polyethylene Terephthalate: Heat Setting and Thermal Stabilization.

Polymeric Materials Encyclopedia. Jabarin S. A. Boca Raton, CRC Press. 12 v.

(9218 p.): 6091 - 6099.

Page 243: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

References

218

Jones, K. (2002). Pet Materials and Applications. Pet Packaging Technology. Sheffield,

UK, Sheffield Academic Press: pp 36-97.

Kang, H. (2001). Synthesis and Characterization of Novel Telechelic High Performance

Polyester Ionomers. Chemistry. Blacksburg,, Virginia Polytechnic Institute and

State University. Masters in Chemistry: 161.

Kegel, M., I. Sbarski, et al. (2002). The Effect of Additives on the Processing and

Physical Properties of Recycled Pet. Annual Technical Conference and

Exhibition, San Francisco, CA, USA.

Khanarian, G., L. Charbonneau, et al. (2000). Sheets Formed from Polyesters Including

Isosorbide. US, HNA Holdings, Inc. US 6,025,061.

Khanarian, G., L. Charbonneau, et al. (2000b). Optical Articles Comprising Isosorbide

Polyester and Method for Making Same. US, E.I. Dupont de Nemours and

Company. US 6,126,992.

Khanarian, G., L. Charbonneau, et al. (2003). Polyester Including Isosorbide as a

Comonmer Blended with Other Thermoplastic Polymers. US, E.I. Dupont de

Nemours and Company. US 6,359,070.

Kim, T. Y., E. A. Lofgren, et al. (2003). "Solid State Polymerization of Poly(Ethylene

Terephthalate). I. Experimental Study of the Reaction Kinectics and Properties."

Journal of Applied Polymer Science 89: 179-212.

Kong, Y. and J. N. Hay (2002). "The Measurement of the Crystallinity of Polymers by

Dsc." Polymer 43(14): 3873-3878.

Kosior, E. (2007). RPET and Its Effects on Morphology, Personal Communication.

Kosmidis, V., D. S. Achillias, et al. (2001). "Polyethylene Terephthalate Recycling and

Recovery of Pure Terephthalic Acid. Kinetics of a Phase Transfer Catalysed

Alkaline Hydrolysis." Macromolecular Materials and Engineering 286(10): 640 -

647.

Lisch., D., K. Silvers., et al. (2005). Container Base Structure Responsive to Vacuum

Related Forces. Vailliencourt, Manchester, MI (US) Amcor Limited, Victoria

(AU) 1-12.

Liu, R.F., Y. S. Hu, et al. (2004). "Crystallinity and Oxygen Transport Properties of Pet

Bottle Walls." Journal of Applied Polymer Science 94(2): 671-677.

Luckenbach, T. A. (2001). Dynamic Mechanical Thermal Analysis, Rheometrics, Inc.: 1-

13.

Page 244: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

References

219

MAGUIRE. (2004). "100 Series Weigh Scale Blender (Wsb)." from

http://www.maguire.com/page.php/100series.htm.

Maruhashi, Y. (2001). "Structure and Physical Properties of Biaxially Stretched

Polyethylene Terephthalate Sheets under Different Heat-Set and Stretch

Conditions." Polymer Engineering & Science 41(12): 2194-2200.

Maruhashi, Y. and T. Asada (1992a). "Structure and Physical Properties of Biaxially

Stretched Polyethylene Terephthalate Sheet after Heat-Setting." Polymer

Engineering and Science 32(7): 481.

Maruhashi, Y. and T. Asada (1992b). "Structure and Physical Properties of Biaxially

Stretched Polyethylene Terephthalate Sheet after Heat-Setting." Polymer

Engineering & Science 32(7): 481-487.

Maruhashi, Y. and T. Asada (1996). "Structure and Properties of Biaxially Stretched

Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate) Sheets." Polymer Engineering & Science 36(4):

483-494.

Mathews, V. (2002). Environmental and Recycling Considerations. Pet Packaging

Technology. Giles G. London, Sheffield Academic Press Ltd. 1: 315-364.

Matthews, R. G., A. Ajji, et al. (2000). "The Effects of Stress Relaxation on the Structure

and Orientation of Tensile Drawn Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate)." Polymer 41(19):

7139-7145.

Mazzeo, F. (2004). An Approach to Testing a Rheologically Unknown Material. TA

Instruments. TA Instruments, 109 Lukens Drive, New Castle, DE-19720, USA: 1-

7.

Mc Chesney, C. and T. S. Chung (1983). "Reduced Carbonation Loss and Increased Hot

Fill Capability of Injection Stretch Blow Pet Bottles." ANTEC 83: plastics-

engineering today for tomorrow's world : conference proceedings:(29).

McFarlane, F. E. (1990). Thermoplastic Polyesters, Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate).

Handbook of Plastic Materials and Technology. s. J. W. a. Sons:: pp 639-647.

Mehta, A., U. Gaur, et al. (1978). "Equilibrium Melting Parameters of Poly(Ethylene

Terephthalate)." Journal of Polymer Science: Polymer Physics Edition 16(2): 289-

296.

Menary, G. H., C. G. Armstrong, et al. (2000). "Modelling of Poly(Ethylene

Terephthalate) in Injection Stretch-Blow Moulding." Plastics, rubber and

composites 29(7): 360-370

Page 245: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

References

220

Milgrom, J. (1992). Polyethylene Terephthalate (Pet). Plastics Recycling : Products and

Processes. R. J. Ehrig. Munich ; New York, Hanser Publishers ; Distributed in the

U.S.A. and Canada by Oxford University Press: vi, 289 p.

Miyagi, A. and B. Wunderlich (1972). "Annealing During Polymerization of Crystalline

Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate)." Journal of Polymer Science: Polymer Physics

Edition 10(10): 2085-2092.

Mooney, M. (1947). "The Rheology of Processing Quality of Raw Rubber." Colloid

polymer Science 2: 69-80.

Moore, L. (1960). "Comparison of Solution Properties of Polyethylene Terethphalate and

Poly (1,4 -Cyclohexylenedimethylene Terethphalate." American Chemical

Society 1(4): 234 - 243.

Nakamura, Y. (1989). Injection Strecth Blow Molding. Blow Molding Handbook :

Technology, Performance, Markets, Economics : The Complete Blow Molding

Operation, Munich ; New York, xxvii, 1010 p.

NAPCOR (2002). Report on Post Consumer Pet Container Recycling Activity. REPORT

ON POST CONSUMER PET CONTAINER RECYCLING ACTIVITY. North

Carolina, National Association for PET Container Resources: 1-9.

Natu, A. A., E. A. Lofgren, et al. (2005). "Effect of Morphology on Barrier Properties of

Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate)." Polymer Engineering & Science 45(3): 400-409.

Nichols, C. and T. Moore (1999). Food Quality Polyester Recycling. US, Wellman Inc.

Nobbs, J. H., D. I. Bower, et al. (1976). "A Study of Molecular Orientation in Drawn and

Shrunk Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate) by Means of Birefringence, Polarized

Fluorescence and X-Ray Diffraction Measurements." Polymer 17(1): 25-36.

O’Farrell, K. and P. Allan (2005). "2005 National Plastics Recycling Survey." 1-52.

Odian, G. (1981). Principles of Polymerization. 2nd,Wiley, New York.

Olabisi, O. (1997). Handbook of Thermoplastics,Marcel Dekker, New York.

Ophir, A., S. Keng, et al. (2004). "Hot Fillable Containers Containing Pet / Pen

Copolymers and Blends." Polymer Engineering and Science 44(9).

Oromiehie, A. and A. Mamizadeh (2004). "Recycling Pet Beverage Bottles and

Improving Properties." Polymer International 53(6): 728-732.

Ozawa, T., T. Hayakawa, et al. (2003). Bottle for Hot Fill Use, Equipment with Vacuum

Absorbtion Panels in the Body Portion. Tokyo, Yoshino Kogyosho Co, Ltd.

Page 246: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

References

221

Painter, Paul C, et al. (1994). Fundamentals of Polymer Science : An Introductory Text.

Lancaster, Pa, Technomic Pub. Co.: xiii, 433 p.

Patuto, J., F. Daver, et al. (2007). Recycled Poly (Ethylene Terephthalate) (Pet) Blends

for Hot - Fill Bottles. ANTEC, Cincinnati, Ohio, Society of Plastics Engineers.

Pilati, F., M. Toselli, et al. (1997). "On Specific Factors Affecting the Crystallization of

Pet: The Role of Carboxyl Terminal Groups and Residual Catalysts on the

Crystallization Rate." Polymer 38(17): 4469-4476.

Potter, T., P. Hatas, et al. (2001). Crystallizing Process. US, Schmalbach-Lubeca AG.

Ramachandran, V. S. (2002). Handbook of Thermal Analysis of Construction

Materials,Noyes Publications, Norwich, N.Y.

Rauwendaal, C. (2000). Spc : Statistical Process Control in Injection Molding and

Extrusion,Hanser Publishers; Hanser Gardner Publications, Munich Cincinnati.

Reading, M., D. Price, et al. (2001). "Measurement of Crystallinity in Polymers Using

Modulated Temperature Differential Scanning Calorimetry." Material

Characterisation by Dynamic and Modulated Thermal Analytical Techniques: 17-

31.

Rosato, D. V. (1989). Polyethylene Terephthalate. Blow Molding Handbook. D. V. R.

Donald V. Rosato. Cincinnati, Hanser Gardner: 539-569.

Rosato, D. V., D. V. Rosato, et al. (1989). Blow Molding Handbook : Technology,

Performance, Markets, Economics : The Complete Blow Molding

Operation,Hanser Publishers ;Distributed in the U.S. by Oxford University Press,

Munich ; New York.

Rosu, R. F., R. A. Shanks, et al. (1999). "Shear Rheology and Thermal Properties of

Linear and Branched Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate) Blends." Polymer 40(21):

Polymer

Rule, M. (2000). Process for Removing Contaminants from Polyesters and Controlling

Polymer Molecular Weight. United States Patent. US, The Coca-Cola Company:

1-11.

Schawe, J. (1995). "A Comparison of Different Evaluation Methods in Modulated

Temperature Dsc." Thermochimica Acta 260 (1995): 1-16.

Scheirs, J. (1998). Polymer Recycling : Science, Technology, and Applications,Wiley,

Chichester ; New York.

Page 247: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

References

222

Scheirs, J. (2003). Additives for the Modification of Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate) to

Produce Engineering-Grade Polymers. Modern Polyesters : Chemistry and

Technology of Polyesters and Copolyesters. J. Scheirs and T. E. Long. Chicester,

John Wiley: xxxi, 750 p.

Scheirs, J. and T. E. Long (2003). Modern Polyesters : Chemistry and Technology of

Polyesters and Copolyesters,John Wiley, Chicester.

Schiavone, R. (2002a). Method of Perparing Modified Polyester Bottle Resin. US,

Wellman Inc. US 6,284,866.

Schiavone, R. (2002b). Synthesis of Pet. Fig. Tranesterification.

Segerman, E. and P. G. Stern (1966). "Two-Phase Model for Structure of Polymers."

Nature 210(5042): 1258-1259.

Shah, V. (1998). Handbook of Plastics Testing Technology. 2nd,Wiley, New York.

Sicher J (2003). Top 10 Us Carbonated Soft Drink Companies and Brands for 2002.

Beverage Digest. 42: 1-2.

Silberman, A., M. Omer, et al. (1998). The Effects of Stretch and Heat Transfer on the

Thermo-Mechanical Properties of Pet Bottles. 56th Annual Technical Conference

and Exhibition, Atlanta, Georgia, Society of Plastic Engineers.

Smith, R. (2002). Rheology Software for Calculation of Molecular Weight Distribution

[Mwd]. T. Instruments.

Sonia., J. and L. Andre. (2001). "Molecular Characterization and Rheological Properties

of Modified Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate Obtained by Reaction Extrusion."

Polymer Engineering and Science 41(8): 1299-1308.

Sototo, R., T. Hama, et al. (2000). "Correlation of Thermally Stimulated Current and

Blow Moulding Conditions in Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate Bottles." Polymer

Engineering and Science 40(2): 391- 397.

Storebeck, R. and M. Ballauff (1996). "Synthesis and Thermal Analysis of Copolyesters

Deriving from 1,4:3,6-Dianhydrosorbitol, Ethylene Glycol, and Terephthalic

Acid." Journal of Applied Polymer Science 59: 1199-1202.

TA Instruments (2004) "Determination of Initial Crystallinity by Modulated DSC."

Internal Publication

Takada, M., K. Sato, et al. (2002). Method of Molding Heat Resistant Containers, Nissei

ASB Machine Co., Ltd.

Page 248: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

References

223

Teichmann D, Masood S, et al., Eds. (2002). Development of High Performance Sorting

Process for Recyling of Plastics. Profiles in Instrial Research Knowledge and

Innovation. Melbourne, Swinburne University of Technology (IRIS).

Tekkanat, B. (2000). Hot-Fill, Heat - Set, Pasteurisation and Retort Technologies. Pet

Packaging Technology. Sheffield, England, Sheffield Academic Press: 292-314.

Thomas, L. (2004). Characterization of Melting Phenomena in Linear Low Density

Polyethylene by Modulated Dsc. TA Instruments, Inc.,.

Torres N, Robin J, et al. (2000). "Study of Thermal and Mechanical Properties of Virgin

and Recycled Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate) before and after Injection." European

Polymer Journal 36: 2075-2080.

Venkateswaran, G., M. Cameron, et al. (1998). "Effects of Temperature Profiles through

Preform Thickness on the Properties of Reheat-Blown Pet Containers." Advances

in Polymer Technology 17(3): 237-249.

Voridian Pty Ltd (2002). Drying for Use in Preforms for Bottles and Containers.

Kingsport, TN, Internal Publication.

Wheeler, B. and R. Betsch (2002a). Echip Reference Manual, Internal Publication.

Wheeler, B., R. Betsch, et al.,(2002b),Users Guide. Software for the Design of

Experiments,

Whelan, T., D. Dunning, et al. (1988). The Dynisco Extrusion Processors Handbook.

1st,Dynisco Inc., Norwood, Mass.

Zachmann, H. G. (1979). "Determination of the Structure of the Noncrystalline Regions

in Isotropic and Oriented Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate)." Polymer Engineering &

Science 19(14): 966-974.

Page 249: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

224

Appendices

Page 250: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

225

Appendices A-1 PLC Timer settings for AOKI SB3 – 100H – 15

PLC NO. NAME DATA *0 INJECTION 5.20 *1 COOLING 4.00 *2 BLOWING 3.00 *3 HIGH PRESSURE BLOW START 5.0 *4 LOW PRESSURE BLOW START 1.0 *5 BLOW MOLD CLOSE START 0.0 *6 STRETCH START 2.0 *7 BOTTOM MOLD UP START 1.0

13 BLOW UNIT UP START 0.0 14 BLOW MOLD CLAMPING PRESSURE NEUTRAL 1.0 15 BLOW AIR EXHAUST 1.50 16 BLOW MOLD OPEN START 2.0 17 BLOW MOLD CLOSE SLOW DOWN 1.00 18 BLOW MOLD OPEN SLOW DOWN 3.0 19 BOTTOM MOLD DOWN START 20.00 20 UPPER MOLD CLOSE SLOW DOWN 3.5 21 UPPER MOLD CLAMPING HIGH PRESSURE 5.8 22 UPPER MOLD CLAMPING PRESSURE INCREASED 5.0 23 UPPER MOLD CLAMPING PRESSURE RELEASE

START 1.0

24 UPPER MOLD OPEN START 1.0 25 UPPER MOLD OPEN FAST START 2.0 26 UPPER MOLD CLAMP PRESSURE RELEASE START 1.5 28 LOWER MOLD OPEN FAST START 1.6 29 LOWER MOLD OPEN START 3.9 30 NOZZLE FORWARD START 3.00 31 INJECTION START 5.0 32 SHUT OFF NOZZLE OPEN START 0 33 SHUT OFF NOZZLE CLOSE START 0 34 NOZZLE BACKWARD START .50

36 SCREW ROTATION START 1.20 37 SCREW CHARGEOVER 99.99

39 DROOLING PREVENT 0 40 EJECTOR DOWN START 1.50

Page 251: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

226

Appendices B-1 Augmented DoE for ISBM production

Trial # Tmould duration Blowing time Cooling Time Preform Materials Virgin Regrind

Exp # 1 80 3 4 CA12 0.6 0.4 Exp # 2 80 7 6 CA12 0.6 0.4 Exp # 3 110 3 5 BB7755 0.6 0.4 Exp # 4 110 5 4 BB7755 0.6 0.4 Exp # 5 80 3 6 BB7755 0.6 0.4 Exp # 6 80 7 4 BB7755 1 0 Exp # 7 110 7 4 CA12 1 0 Exp # 8 80 7 6 CA12 1 0 Exp # 9 80 3 4 CA12 1 0 Exp # 10 110 3 6 BB7755 1 0 Exp # 11 110 3 4 CA12 0.8 0.2 Exp # 12 80 7 4 CA12 0.6 0.4 Exp # 13 110 7 6 BB7755 0.733 0.267 Exp # 14 80 3 6 CA12 1 0 Exp # 15 95 3 4 BB7755 1 0 Exp # 16 95 7 5 CA12 0.6 0.4

Exp # 17 110 5 6 CA12 0.6 0.4 Exp # 18 95 7 6 BB7755 1 0 Exp # 19 80 5 5 BB7755 0.8 0.2 Exp # 20 110 5 5 BB7755 1 0 Exp # 21 95 5 5 CA12 0.8 0.2 Exp # 22 110 7 4 BB7755 0.6 0.4 Exp # 23 95 3 6 CA12 0.733 0.267 Exp # 24 110 7 5 CA12 1 0 Exp # 25 110 3 6 CA12 0.6 0.4 Exp # 23R 95 3 6 CA12 0.733 0.267 Exp # 24R 110 7 5 CA12 1 0 Exp # 25R 110 3 6 CA12 0.6 0.4 Exp # 22RR 110 7 4 BB7755 0.6 0.4 Exp # 23RR 95 3 6 CA12 0.733 0.267

Page 252: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

227

Appendices C-1 Contour 1-D plots from initial DoE for hot-fill shrinkage (S2) and preform cooling time

Appendices C-2 Contour 1-D plots from initial DoE for hot-fill shrinkage (S2) and mould temperature

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

80 85 90 95 100 105 110

Mould Temperature

Hot-fill and Mould Temperature

LimitsMould Temperature

Mould Temperature = 95.0Duration = 5.0Material = 0.516Recycled = 0.484Material Order = 1

10

20

30

40

50

4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0

Preform Cooling Time

Hot-fill and Preform Cooling Time

Limits Preform Cooling Time

Mould Temperature = 95.0Duration = 5.0Material = 0.516Recycled = 0.484Material Order = 1

Page 253: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

228

Appendices C-3 Contour 1-D plots from initial DoE for hot-fill shrinkage (S2) and blow time

Appendices C-4 Contour 1-D plots from initial DoE for Burst test and preform cooling time

\

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0

Blow Time

Hot-fill and Blow Time

LimitsBlow Time

Mould Temperature = 95.0Duration = 5.0Material = 0.516Recycled = 0.484Material Order = 1

600

800

1000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0

Preform Cooling Time

Burst Test

LimitsPreform Cooling Time

Mould Temperature = 95.0Duration = 5.0Material = 0.516Recycled = 0.484Material Order = 1

Page 254: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

229

Appendices C-5 Contour 1-D plots from initial DoE for burst test and mould temperature

Appendices C-6 Contour 1-D plots from initial DoE for burst test and blow time

800

1000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

80 85 90 95 100 105 110

Mould Temperature

Burst test

LimitsMould Temperature

Mould Temperature = 95.0Duration = 5.0Material = 0.516Recycled = 0.484Material Order = 1

900

1200

1500

1800

3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0

Blow Time

Burst test

LimitsBlow Time

Mould Temperature = 95.0Duration = 5.0Material = 0.516Recycled = 0.484Material Order = 1

Page 255: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

230

Appendices C-7 Contour 1-D plots from initial DoE for Top load and mould temperature

Appendices C-8 Contour 1-D plots from initial DoE for top load and blow time

ECHIP

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

80 85 90 95 100 105 110

Mould Temperature

Hot-fill and Mould Temperature

LimitsMould Temperature

Mould Temperature = 95.0Duration = 5.0Material = 0.516Recycled = 0.484Material Order = 1

0.30

0.35

0.40

0.45

0.50

3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0

Blow Time

Top load

Limits Blow Time

Mould Temperature = 95.0 Duration = 5.0Material = 0.516Recycled = 0.484 Material Order = 1

Page 256: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

231

Appendices C-9 Contour 1-D plots from initial DoE for top load and preform cooling time

0.30

0.35

0.40

0.45

0.50

4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0

Preform Cooling Time

Top Load

LimitsPreform Cooling Time

Mould Temperature = 95.0Duration = 5.0Material = 0.516Recycled = 0.484Material Order = 1

Page 257: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

232

Appendices D-1 Contour 1-D plots via augmented DoE for hot-fill shrinkage (S2) and preform cooling time

Appendices D-2 Contour 1-D plots via augmented DoE for hot-fill shrinkage (S2) and

blow time

5

10

15

20

4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0

Preform Cooling Time

Hot-fill shrinkage (S2)

LimitsPreform Cooling Time

Mould Temperature = 95.0 Blow Time = 5.0Material = 0.487Recycled = 0.513Material Order = 1

0

5

10

15

20

3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0

Blow Time

Hot-fill shrinkage (S2)

LimitsBlow Time

Mould Temperature = 95.0 Blow Time = 5.0Material = 0.487 Recycled = 0.513 Material Order = 1

Page 258: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

233

Appendices D-3 Contour 1-D plots via augmented DoE for hot-fill shrinkage (S2) and mould temperature

0

5

10

15

20

80 85 90 95 100 105 110

Mould Temperature

Hot-fill shrinkage (S2)

Limits Mould Temperature

Mould Temperature = 95.0 Blow Time = 5.0Material = 0.487 Recycled = 0.513 Material Order = 1

Page 259: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

234

Appendices E-1 Pareto affects charts via Augmented DoE for hot-fill shrinkage

Appendices E-2 Pareto affects charts via Augmented DoE for top load

Term

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9Effect

Pareto Effects for Hot-Fill Shrinkage

3 Preform Cooling Tim+8 Mould Temperature*Material- 9 Mould Temperature*Recycled+

13 Preform Cooling Tim*Material+10 Blow Time*Preform Cooling Time -14 Preform Cooling Tim*Recycled-16 Mould Temperature^2- 21 Material Order[2]- 11 Blow Time*Material

+ 12 Blow Time*Recycled- 1 Mould Temperature

+ 7 Mould Temperature*Preform Cooling Time+ 4 Material+ 5 Recycled

-

Term

0.00 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.050.060.070.08

Effect

Pareto Effects for Top Load

13 Preform Cooling Tim*Material - 14 Preform Cooling Tim*Recycled + 10 Blow Time*Preform Cooling Tim+

- 3 Preform Cooling Time -

19 Material^2- 20 Recycled^2-6 Mould Temperature*Blow Time + 8 Mould Temperature*Material + 9 Mould Temperature*Recycled- 4 Material- 5 Recycled+

21 Material Order[2]+ 11Blow Time*Material+

7 Mould Temperature*Preform Cooling Time

Page 260: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

235

Appendices F-1 Optimised CA12 – RPET blend Pareto effects charts via Augmented DoE for burst test versus Mould temperature.

Appendices F-2 Optimised CA12 – RPET blend Pareto effects charts via Augmented DoE plot for hot-fill shrinkage versus preform cooling time

0.600.650.700.750.800.850.900.951.00

Material

Recycled

80 85 90 95 100 105 110

Burst Test

Blow Time = 4.6Preform Cooling Tim = 6.0 Material Order = 1

1681.54 2002.87

Mould Temperature

1360.22

Recycled=0.040 High Limit

Material=0.960Low Limit

Mould Temp= 95.00Value

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

Mould Temperature

4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0

Hot Fill Shrinkage

3

5 6 8 10

12

Value Low Limit High Limit -1.49 -8.18 5.21 Preform =4 00 Mould Temp=110.00

Recycled

Blow Time = 4.6Preform Cooling Tim = 6.0 Material Order = 1

Preform Cooling Time

Page 261: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

236

Appendices F-3 Optimised CA12 – RPET blend Pareto effects charts via Augmented DoE plot for top load versus preform cooling time

0.600.650.700.750.800.850.900.951.00

Recycled

4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0Preform Cooling Tim

Mould Temperature = 110.0Blow Time = 3.0 Material Order = 2

Material

Top Load

ValuePreform =4.00

0 .437

Material=0.960Low Limit

0.558

Recycled=0.040 High Limit

0 .436

Page 262: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

237

Appendices G-1 Excel graphs to hot-fill shrinkage (S2) results via augmented DoE model

Augmented DoE Hotfill Shrinkage S2 Results

2

7

12

17

22

27

Exp #

1Exp

# 2

Exp #

3Exp

# 4

Exp #

5Exp

# 6

Exp #

7Exp

# 8

Exp #

9Exp

# 10

Exp #

11Exp

# 12

Exp #

13Exp

# 14

Exp #

15Exp

# 16

Exp #

17Exp

# 18

Exp #

19Exp

# 20

Exp #

21Exp

# 22

Exp #

23Exp

# 24

Exp #

25Exp

# 23

RExp

# 24

RExp

# 25

RExp

# 22

RRExp

# 23

RR

Experimental Number

Shrin

kage

%

Mean (+) Std Dev (-) Std Dev

Page 263: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

238

Appendices G-2 Excel graphs to process shrinkage results (S1) via augmented DoE model

Process Shrinkage (S1) as a function of increases heat- set temperatures

0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1

Exp #

1Exp

# 2

Exp #

3Exp

# 4

Exp #

5Exp

# 6

Exp #

7Exp

# 8

Exp #

9Exp

# 10

Exp #

11Exp

# 12

Exp #

13Exp

# 14

Exp #

15Exp

# 16

Exp #

17Exp

# 18

Exp #

19Exp

# 20

Exp #

21Exp

# 22

Exp #

23Exp

# 24

Exp #

25Exp

# 23

RExp

# 24

RExp

# 25

RExp

# 22

RRExp

# 23

RR

Experimental Number

Shrin

kage

%

Mean (+) Std Dev (-) Std Dev

Page 264: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

239

Appendices H-1. Consolidated data to augmented DoE

Bottle Weight

Nominal Vol 72 hrs (V1)

Hot Fill (V2) % Volume

Shrinkage (s1) % Volume

Shrinkage (s2) Panel Wall

Thickness Av Burst test

(Kpa)

Blow Time

(s)

Preform Cooling Time

(s) Material Virgin RPET Heat Set

Temperature

Exp # 1 19.60362 375.23638 361.09638 0.203090426 3.7682913 0.3258611 1102.000 3 4 CA12 0.6 0.4 80 Exp # 2 19.60346 375.35654 357.19654 0.171132979 4.8380668 0.3153333 1105.000 7 6 CA12 0.6 0.4 80 Exp # 3 19.6553 375.3047 356.8247 0.184920213 4.9239991 0.3215278 1160.000 3 5 BB7755 0.6 0.4 110 Exp # 4 19.6579 374.3621 357.2621 0.435611702 4.5677701 0.2991944 1197.500 5 4 BB7755 0.6 0.4 110 Exp # 5 19.5979 375.5821 362.1421 0.111143617 3.5784453 0.3410833 1092.000 3 6 BB7755 0.6 0.4 80 Exp # 6 19.62238 375.55762 359.59762 0.117654255 4.2496808 0.2994167 1305.000 7 4 BB7755 1 0 80 Exp # 7 19.58848 375.77152 358.61152 0.060765957 4.5666047 0.2989444 983.333 7 4 CA12 1 0 110 Exp # 8 19.5904 374.5896 319.1896 0.375106383 14.789519 0.3127778 1545.000 7 6 CA12 1 0 80 Exp # 9 19.5928 375.8872 353.0672 0.03 6.0709702 0.2989444 1360.000 3 4 CA12 1 0 80 Exp # 10 19.63726 373.34274 336.30274 0.706718085 9.9211786 0.3144167 1615.000 3 6 BB7755 1 0 110 Exp # 11 19.5881 374.8519 357.5119 0.305345745 4.6258269 0.3436667 740.000 3 4 CA12 0.8 0.2 110 Exp # 12 19.63948 375.68052 357.28052 0.084968085 4.8977786 0.3015278 860.000 7 4 CA12 0.6 0.4 80 Exp # 13 19.58864 374.57136 357.53136 0.379957447 4.5491999 0.0276993 1130.000 7 6 BB7755 0.733 0.267 110 Exp # 14 19.5997 373.8803 318.4603 0.56375 14.822926 0.3210278 1565.000 3 6 CA12 1 0 80 Exp # 15 19.61602 375.78398 367.15862 0.057452128 2.2952961 0.2994167 1155.000 3 4 BB7755 1 0 95 Exp # 16 19.63068 375.52932 348.08932 0.125180851 7.3070193 0.3028333 1165.000 7 5 CA12 0.6 0.4 95 Exp # 17 19.67998 373.84002 323.14002 0.574462766 13.561951 0.2994722 1322.000 5 6 CA12 0.6 0.4 110 Exp # 18 19.61794 373.78206 327.382 0.58987766 12.413667 0.3108333 1572.000 7 6 BB7755 1 0 95 Exp # 19 19.62352 374.33648 352.51648 0.442425532 5.8289804 0.3383889 1342.000 5 5 BB7755 0.8 0.2 80 Exp # 20 19.62102 374.77898 350.87983 0.324739362 6.3768642 0.3076389 1592.000 5 5 BB7755 1 0 110 Exp # 21 19.594 374.966 346.546 0.275 7.5793539 0.3356111 1292.000 5 5 CA12 0.8 0.2 95 Exp # 22 19.669 375.271 357.531 0.193882979 4.7272504 0.3376944 965.000 7 4 BB7755 0.6 0.4 110 Exp # 23 19.65146 372.14854 296.06854 1.024324468 20.44345 0.3208333 1306.000 3 5.9 CA12 0.733 0.267 95 Exp # 24 19.5666 374.3934 330.7334 0.427287234 11.66153 0.3418333 1482.500 7 5 CA12 1 0 110 Exp # 25 19.64984 372.31016 308.20155 0.981340426 17.219141 0.32775 1343.333 3 6 CA12 0.6 0.4 110 Exp # 23R 19.64564 372.77436 316.79436 0.857882979 15.017127 0.3410833 1342.500 3 6 CA12 0.733 0.267 95 Exp # 24R 19.57908 374.54092 347.02092 0.388053191 7.3476618 0.3221111 1482.500 7 5 CA12 1 0 110 Exp # 25R 19.6567 372.7833 316.7433 0.855505319 15.032862 0.3270556 1362.500 3 6 CA12 0.6 0.4 110 Exp # 22R 19.66468 375.13532 359.87532 0.229968085 4.0678654 0.3013333 1242.500 7 4 BB7755 0.6 0.4 110 Exp # 23RR 19.64728 372.97272 324.63272 0.80512766 12.960733 0.3256389 1370.000 3 6 CA12 0.733 0.267 95

Page 265: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

240

Appendices I– a, b, c, d Calibrated Kinetic Heat flow curves for Optimised DoE BB7755 – RPET blend containers via heat-set temperature range 120 – 150 oC

(a) Heat-set temperature @ 120 oC (b) Heat-set temperature @ 130 oC

(c) Heat-set temperature @ 140 oC (d) Heat-set temperature @ 150 oC

216.30°C

183.26°C18.58J/g13.76 % crystallized

-0.11

-0.09

-0.07

-0.05

-0.03

-0.01

0.01

0.03

0.05

Non

rev

Hea

t Flo

w (W

/g)

30 80 130 180 230 280

Temperature (°C)

Sample: Heat Set Calibrated Sample @130Size: 8.8000 mgMethod: Conventional MDSCComment: Heat Set Sample @130 C repeat for thermal investigation

DSCFile: Heat Set @ 130 C Calibrated rev and n...Operator: JPRun Date: 21-Nov-06 13:58Instrument: DSC Q100 V8.2 Build 268

Exo Up Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

226.33°C

172.47°C20.59J/g15.25 % crystallized

-0.15

-0.10

-0.05

0.00

0.05

Non

rev

Hea

t Flo

w (W

/g)

30 80 130 180 230 280

Temperature (°C)

Sample: Heat Set Calibrated Sample @140Size: 8.6000 mgMethod: Conventional MDSCComment: Heat Set Sample @140 C repeat for thermal investigation

DSCFile: Heat Set @ 140 C Calibrated rev and n...Operator: JPRun Date: 21-Nov-06 19:28Instrument: DSC Q100 V8.2 Build 268

Exo Up Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

223.87°C

188.10°C13.41J/g9.930 % crystallized

-0.15

-0.10

-0.05

0.00

0.05

Non

rev

Hea

t Flo

w (W

/g)

30 80 130 180 230 280

Temperature (°C)

Sample: Heat Set Calibrated Sample @150Size: 8.9000 mgMethod: Conventional MDSCComment: Heat Set Sample @150 C repeat for thermal investigation

DSCFile: Heat Set @ 150 C Calibrated rev and n...Operator: JPRun Date: 23-Nov-06 09:46Instrument: DSC Q100 V8.2 Build 268

Exo Up Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

222.32°C

180.72°C15.70J/g11.63 % crystallized

-0.15

-0.10

-0.05

0.00

0.05

0.10

Non

rev

Hea

t Flo

w (W

/g)

30 80 130 180 230 280

Temperature (°C)

Sample: Heat Set Calibrated Sample @120Size: 8.7000 mgMethod: Conventional MDSCComment: Heat Set Sample @120 C repeat for thermal investigation

DSCFile: Heat Set @ 120 C Calibrated rev and n...Operator: JPRun Date: 21-Nov-06 09:07Instrument: DSC Q100 V8.2 Build 268

Exo Up Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

Page 266: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

241

Appendices J– a, b, c, d TMSDC thermograph for 60 % BB7755 – 40 % RPET Total Heat Flow Curves

(a) Heat-set temperature @ 120 oC (b) Heat-set temperature @ 130 oC (c) Heat-set temperature @ 140 oC (d) Heat-set temperature @ 150 oC

255.55°C

244.06°C50.48J/g37.39 % crystallized

-0.20

-0.15

-0.10

-0.05

0.00

0.05

Hea

t Flo

w (W

/g)

203.144 253.144

Temperature (°C)

Sample: Heat Set Calibrated Sample @120Size: 8.7000 mgMethod: Conventional MDSCComment: Heat Set Sample @120 C repeat for thermal investigation

DSCFile: Heat Set @ 120 C Calibrated Heat flow...Operator: JPRun Date: 21-Nov-06 09:07Instrument: DSC Q100 V8.2 Build 268

Exo Up Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

255.66°C

244.46°C50.31J/g37.27 % crystallized

-0.20

-0.15

-0.10

-0.05

0.00

0.05

Hea

t Flo

w (W

/g)

207.95 257.95

Temperature (°C)

Sample: Heat Set Calibrated Sample @130Size: 8.8000 mgMethod: Conventional MDSCComment: Heat Set Sample @130 C repeat for thermal investigation

DSCFile: Heat Set @ 130 C Calibrated heat flowOperator: JPRun Date: 21-Nov-06 13:58Instrument: DSC Q100 V8.2 Build 268

Exo Up Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

256.47°C

244.37°C51.38J/g38.06 % crystallized

-0.20

-0.15

-0.10

-0.05

0.00

Hea

t Flo

w (W

/g)

198.052 248.052

Temperature (°C)

Sample: Heat Set Calibrated Sample @140Size: 8.6000 mgMethod: Conventional MDSCComment: Heat Set Sample @140 C repeat for thermal investigation

DSCFile: Heat Set @ 140 C Calibrated heat flowOperator: JPRun Date: 21-Nov-06 19:28Instrument: DSC Q100 V8.2 Build 268

Exo Up Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

255.95°C

244.97°C49.19J/g36.44 % crystallized

-0.20

-0.15

-0.10

-0.05

0.00

Hea

t Flo

w (W

/g)

207.04 257.04

Temperature (°C)

Sample: Heat Set Calibrated Sample @150Size: 8.9000 mgMethod: Conventional MDSCComment: Heat Set Sample @150 C repeat for thermal investigation

DSCFile: Heat Set @ 150 C Calibrated heat flowOperator: JPRun Date: 23-Nov-06 09:46Instrument: DSC Q100 V8.2 Build 268

Exo Up Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

Page 267: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

242

89.56°C(T)

82.17°C

97.34°C

55.00°C

120.00°C

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

Rev

Cp

(J/g

/°C

)

55 75 95 115

Temperature (°C)

Sample: Heat Set Calibrated Sample @120Size: 8.7000 mgMethod: Conventional MDSCComment: Heat Set Sample @120 C repeat for thermal investigation

DSCFile: Heat Set @ 120 C Calibrated Tg Rev CpOperator: JPRun Date: 21-Nov-06 09:07Instrument: DSC Q100 V8.2 Build 268

Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

Appendices K – a, b, c, d Glass transition results for Optimised DoE beverage containers; heat-set temperatures range between 120 – 150 oC

(a) Heat-set temperature @ 120 oC (b) Heat-set temperature @ 130 oC

(c) Heat-set temperature @ 140 oC (d) Heat-set temperature @ 150 oC

92.47°C(T)

84.91°C

99.90°C

55.00°C

120.00°C

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

Rev

Cp

(J/g

/°C

)

55 75 95 115

Temperature (°C)

Sample: Heat Set Calibrated Sample @130Size: 8.8000 mgMethod: Conventional MDSCComment: Heat Set Sample @130 C repeat for thermal investigation

DSCFile: Heat Set @ 130 C Calibrated Tg Rev CpOperator: JPRun Date: 21-Nov-06 13:58Instrument: DSC Q100 V8.2 Build 268

Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

89.92°C(T)

82.79°C

96.90°C

55.00°C

120.00°C

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

Rev

Cp

(J/g

/°C

)

55 75 95 115

Temperature (°C)

Sample: Heat Set Calibrated Sample @140Size: 8.6000 mgMethod: Conventional MDSCComment: Heat Set Sample @140 C repeat for thermal investigation

DSCFile: Heat Set @ 140 C Calibrated Tg Rev CpOperator: JPRun Date: 21-Nov-06 19:28Instrument: DSC Q100 V8.2 Build 268

Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

93.66°C(T)

87.90°C

98.16°C

55.00°C

120.00°C

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

Rev

Cp

(J/g

/°C

)

55 75 95 115

Temperature (°C)

Sample: Heat Set Calibrated Sample @150Size: 8.9000 mgMethod: Conventional MDSCComment: Heat Set Sample @150 C repeat for thermal investigation

DSCFile: Heat Set @ 150 C Calibrated Tg Rev CpOperator: JPRun Date: 23-Nov-06 09:46Instrument: DSC Q100 V8.2 Build 268

Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

Page 268: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

243

Appendices L – a, b, c, d for Tg temperature via d(Cp/dT) curve Optimised Heat-set 60 % BB7755 - 40 % RPET blend

(a) Heat-set temperature @ 120 oC (b) Heat-set temperature @ 130 oC

(c) Heat-set temperature @ 140 oC (d) Heat-set temperature @ 150 oC

92.00°C

-0.02

-0.01

0.00

0.01

0.02

0.03

Der

iv. R

ev C

p (J

/g/°

C/°

C)

63.45 73.45 83.45 93.45 103.45 113.45

Temperature (°C)

Sample: Heat Set Calibrated Sample @130Size: 8.8000 mgMethod: Conventional MDSCComment: Heat Set Sample @130 C repeat for thermal investigation

DSCFile: Heat Set @ 130 C Calibrated Tg Rev CpOperator: JPRun Date: 21-Nov-06 13:58Instrument: DSC Q100 V8.2 Build 268

Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

88.12°C

-0.02

-0.01

0.00

0.01

0.02

0.03

Der

iv. R

ev C

p (J

/g/°

C/°

C)

63.45 73.45 83.45 93.45 103.45 113.45

Temperature (°C)

Sample: Heat Set Calibrated Sample @140Size: 8.6000 mgMethod: Conventional MDSCComment: Heat Set Sample @140 C repeat for thermal investigation

DSCFile: Heat Set @ 140 C Calibrated Tg Rev CpOperator: JPRun Date: 21-Nov-06 19:28Instrument: DSC Q100 V8.2 Build 268

Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

89.71°C

-0.02

-0.01

0.00

0.01

0.02

0.03

Der

iv. R

ev C

p (J

/g/°

C/°

C)

63.45 73.45 83.45 93.45 103.45 113.45

Temperature (°C)

Sample: Heat Set Calibrated Sample @150Size: 8.9000 mgMethod: Conventional MDSCComment: Heat Set Sample @150 C repeat for thermal investigation

DSCFile: Heat Set @ 150 C Calibrated Tg Rev CpOperator: JPRun Date: 23-Nov-06 09:46Instrument: DSC Q100 V8.2 Build 268

Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

63.45°C113.45°C

88.89°C

-0.02

-0.01

0.00

0.01

0.02

0.03

Der

iv. R

ev C

p (J

/g/°

C/°

C)

63.45 73.45 83.45 93.45 103.45 113.45

Temperature (°C)

Sample: Heat Set Calibrated Sample @120Size: 8.7000 mgMethod: Conventional MDSCComment: Heat Set Sample @120 C repeat for thermal investigation

DSCFile: Heat Set @ 120 C Calibrated Tg Rev CpOperator: JPRun Date: 21-Nov-06 09:07Instrument: DSC Q100 V8.2 Build 268

Universal V3.9A TA Instruments

Page 269: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

244

Appendices M -1 SAXS diffraction patterns for Optimised DoE BB7755 – RPET blend containers via heat-set temperature range 120 oC

Page 270: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

245

Appendices M -2 SAXS diffraction patterns for Optimised DoE BB7755 – RPET blend containers via heat-set temperature range 130 oC

Page 271: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

246

Appendices M - 3 SAXS diffraction patterns for Optimised DoE BB7755 – RPET blend containers via heat-set temperature range 140 oC.

Page 272: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

247

Appendices M – 4 SAXS diffraction patterns for Optimised DoE BB7755 – RPET blend containers via heat-set temperature range 150 oC

Page 273: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

248

Appendices N - 1 Thermal analysis results obtained from TMDSC for all PET raw materials CSD CA12 BB7755 RPET Repeat Tg 1st Run (°C) 77.29 (I) 76.45 (I) 78.61 (I) 72.06 (I)

Data Limits x1;65.8 °C x5;86.23 °C

x1;60 °C x5;83.10 °C

x1;62°C x5;95.88°C

x1;62.36 °C x5;82.00 °C

Rev Cp Tg 2nd Run (°C) 80.28 78.58 82.02 78.20

Data Limits Rev Cp Tg 2nd Run

x1;65.8 °C x5;86.23 °C

x1;60 °C x5;83.10 °C

x1;62°C x5;95.88°C

x1;61.46 °C x5;101.53 °C

Tcc (°C) 118.22 °C 116.26 °C 109.69 °C 114.68 °C

ccHΔ (J/g) 26.75 (J/g) 22.69 (J/g) 35.77 (J/g) 24.48(J/g)

Data Limits Tcc X1; 105.9 X2; 267.44

X1; 80.00 X2; 266.43

X1; 92.93 X2; 271.10

X1; 91.65 X2; 265.08

Initial χ % 16.92 % 16.81 % 26.50 % 15.25 %

m1T 1st Run (Total) (°C)

251.58 °C 250.05 °C 257.69 °C 253.56 °C

Initial χ % 16.15 42.10 37.88 41.58

Data Limits Tm X1; 217.32 X2; 267.44

X1; 217.83 X2; 266.43

X1; 166.56 X2; 271.11

X1; 174.48 X2; 265.08

mHΔ (J/g) 42.10 (J/g) 51.14 (J/g) 56.14 (J/g) Total Heat Flow second heating

°C °C °C °C 2mT (°C) 245.73 °C 250.72 °C 258.21 °C 248.62 °C

Data Limits Tm X1; 110. X2; 265.70

X1; 100 X2; 267.88

X1; 218.00 X2; 271.11

X1; 91.65 X2; 267.59

Time Limits 350-444.70 S 350-444.70 S 350-444.70 S ( ))/, gJH totalmΔ 65.86 (J/g) 70.91 (J/g) 64.32 (J/g) 64.29 (J/g)

Rev Hf Second Heating

Tm1 (°C) °C °C °C °C Tm2 (°C) 245.73 °C 241.60 °C 249.38°C 242.02 °C

Data Limits Tm X1; 110. X2; 265.70

X1; 100 X2; 267.88

X1; 118.00 X2; 270.69

X1; 172.92 X2; 266.57

Time Limits 350-444.70 S 350-444.0 S 350-444.00 S 350 – 430 S ( ))/, gJH RmΔ 35.09 (J/g) 37.59 (J/g) 38.95 (J/g) 40.33 (J/g)

Non Rev Hf Second Heating

Tm1 (°C) °C °C °C °C Tm2 (°C) 253.09 °C 251.18 °C 258.62 °C 253.45

Data Limits Tm X1; 110. X2; 265.70

X1; 100 X2; 267.88

X1; 118.00 X2; 270.69

X1; 91.65 X2; 267.59

Time Limits 350-444.70 S 350-444.0 S 350-444.00 S ( ))/, gJH NRmΔ 30.89 (J/g) 32.17 (J/g) 24.64 (J/g) 23.78 (J/g)

Page 274: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

249

2nd Cooling Tc 211.50 °C 200.46 °C 206.17°C 215.50

( )gJHc /Δ 54.78 (J/g) 51.26 (J/g) 59.12 (J/g) 56.32 (J/g) Initial χ % 40.58 % 37.97 % 43.80 % 40.23 % Time Limits 350-560 S 448 - 560 S 350-560 S

Page 275: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

250

Appendices O -1 Results table for tensile properties to all PET materials used.

BB7755

Specimen Number

Yeild Stress (Mpa)

Disp Max (%)

Energy Yeild (J)

CrossHead Disp (mm)

% Elongation @ break

Modulus (Mpa)

UBRK. Str (Mpa)

Enery Break J

1 62.38 74.58 0.2543 37.29 74.58 2433 3.22 7.072 2 62.777 69.7 0.23 34.85 69.7 2833 3.225 5.703 3 62.2486 72.64 0.193 36.32 72.64 2529 3.233 5.995 4 62.84 66.84 0.1436 33.42 66.84 2827 3.207 5.959 5 62.87 73.32 0.182 36.66 73.32 2528 3.237 6.225 Mean: 62.62312 71.416 0.20058 35.708 71.416 2630 3.2244 6.1908 Standard Deviation 0.257308487 2.793518 0.0384728 1.396759106 2.79351821 166.992215 0.010537552 0.470681

+ Std. Dev 62.88042849 74.20952 0.2390528 37.10475911 74.2095182 2796.99222 3.234937552 6.661481 - Std. Dev 62.36581151 68.62248 0.1621072 34.31124089 68.6224818 2463.00778 3.213862448 5.720119 Cv 0.004108842 0.039116 0.1918076 0.039116139 0.03911614 0.06349514 0.003268066 0.076029 CA12

Specimen Number

Yeild Stress (Mpa)

Disp Max (%)

Energy Yeild (J)

CrossHead Disp (mm)

% Elongation @ break

Modulus (Mpa)

UBRK. Str (Mpa)

Enery Break J

1 65.78 69.36 0.1513 34.68 69.36 3143 3.203 5.639 2 65.057 77.66 0.2428 38.83 77.66 2910 3.259 6.725 3 65.354 68.88 0.1489 34.44 68.88 2584 3.259 5.713 4 64.95 62.74 0.1836 31.37 62.74 2531 0.477 5.89 5 65.45 70.18 0.1667 35.09 70.18 2588 3.168 6.387 Mean: 65.3182 69.764 0.17866 34.882 69.764 2751.2 2.6732 6.0708 Standard Deviation 0.295197832 4.74976 0.0343965 2.374880208 4.74976042 237.403791 1.098647605 0.418359

+ Std. Dev 65.61339783 74.51376 0.2130565 37.25688021 74.5137604 2988.60379 3.771847605 6.489159 - Std. Dev 65.02300217 65.01424 0.1442635 32.50711979 65.0142396 2513.79621 1.574552395 5.652441 Cv 0.004519381 0.068083 0.1925252 0.068083258 0.06808326 0.086291 0.410985936 0.068913 RPET

Specimen Number

Yeild Stress (Mpa)

Disp Max (%)

Energy Yeild (J)

CrossHead Disp (mm)

% Elongation @ break

Modulus (Mpa)

UBRK. Str (Mpa)

Enery Break J

1 57.94 7.486 0.2207 3.743 7.486 2567 0.7 0.5757 2 59.6 8.406 0.1795 4.203 8.406 2549 0.686 0.686 3 64.43 11.334 0.1797 5.667 11.334 2640 0.5906 1.42 4 63.44 11.45 0.0762 5.725 11.45 2639 0.0437 1.375 5 64.89 54.8 0.1513 27.4 54.8 2851 3.102 3.202 Mean: 62.06 18.6952 0.16148 9.3476 18.6952 2649.2 1.02446 1.45174 Standard Deviation 2.776911954 18.12043 0.0480417 9.06021681 18.1204336 107.432584 1.06640767 0.94065

+ Std. Dev 64.83691195 36.81563 0.2095217 18.40781681 36.8156336 2756.63258 2.09086767 2.39239 - Std. Dev 59.28308805 0.574766 0.1134383 0.28738319 0.57476638 2541.76742 -0.04194767 0.51109 Cv 0.0447456 0.969256 0.2975085 0.969255938 0.96925594 0.04055284 1.040946128 0.647946

Page 276: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

251

Appendices O - 2 Izod Impact test for all PET materials used.

Sample # (1 J) SkyPET BB7755 Voridian CA12 Visy RPET

Energy (J)

aiN (J/m2)

aiN (J/m)

Energy (J)

aiN (J/m2) aiN (J/m) Energy

(J) aiN (J/m2) aiN (J/m)

1 0.09 2572.66 26.24 0.09 2691.86 27.46 0.08 2274.67 23.2 2 0.11 3287.84 33.54 0.09 2751.46 28.06 0.04 1082.70 11.0 3 0.09 2751.46 28.06 0.08 2513.06 25.63 0.08 2334.27 23.8 4 0.08 2274.67 23.20 0.08 2364.07 24.11 0.08 2304.47 23.5 5 0.11 3377.24 34.45 0.08 2423.66 24.72 0.08 2244.87 22.9 Std Dev 0.01 421.26 4.30 0.01 150.06 1.53 0.02 483.67 4.9 + Std. Dev 0.11 3274.03 33.40 0.09 2698.89 27.53 0.08 2531.86 25.825 Mean 0.10 2852.77 29.10 0.09 2548.82 26.00 0.07 2048.20 20.9 - Std. Dev 0.08 2431.52 24.80 0.08 2398.76 24.47 0.05 1564.53 15.9582Cv 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.24 0.24 0.24

Page 277: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

252

Appendices P – 1 Top 4 IR SP03 thermal imaging camera measurements for process

shrinkage (S1) shrinkage results for Optimised BB7755 – RPET blend DoE

Top 4 hot-fill shrinkage S1

Spot 3 Av

Exp # 7 100.20 113.70

Exp # 9 100.9 114.07

Exp # 12 100.90 114.07

Exp # 15 102.5 115.03

Mean 101.125 114.22

std Dev 0.974252 0.569056

std Dev + 102.0993 114.7866

std Dev - 100.1507 113.6484

CV 0.009634 0.004982

Appendices P – 2 Bottom 4 IR SP03 thermal imaging camera measurements for process

shrinkage (S1) shrinkage results for Optimised BB7755 – RPET blend DoE

Bottom 4 hot-fill shrinkage S1

Spot 3 Av

Exp # 23 94 106.87

Exp # 25 103.50 114.33

Exp # 23R 91.7 102.80

Exp # 25RR 91.9 102.27

Mean 95.275 106.57

std Dev 5.581144 5.56956703

std Dev + 100.8561 112.137067

std Dev - 89.69386 100.997933

CV 0.058579 0.05226328

Page 278: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

253

Appendices P – 3 Top 5 IR SP03 thermal imaging camera measurements for hot-fill (S2) shrinkage results for Optimised BB7755 – RPET blend DoE

Top 5 hot-fill shrinkage S2

SP 03 Av

Exp # 1 100.80 112.03

Exp # 5 97.6 113.07

Exp # 6 102.90 115.10

Exp # 15 102.5 115.03

Exp # 22R 102.9 115.2

Mean 100.95 113.81

std Dev 2.263405 1.4502

std Dev + 103.2134 115.2594

std Dev - 98.6866 112.359

CV 0.022421 0.012742

Appendices P – 4 Bottom 5 IR SP03 thermal imaging camera measurements for hot-fill (S2) shrinkage results for Optimised BB7755 – RPET blend DoE

Worst Hot-fill shrinkage S2

SP 03 Av

Exp #14 90 102.73

Exp # 23 94 106.87

Exp # 25 103.50 114.33

Exp # 23R 91.7 102.80

Exp # 25R 91.9 102.27

Mean 94.8 106.683333

std Dev 5.378383 5.11910387

std Dev + 100.1784 111.802437

std Dev - 89.42162 101.564229

CV 0.056734 0.0479841

Page 279: Investigation of Recycled PET and Its Application for Blow ...

Appendices

254

Appendices Q-1 Average wall thickness panel section via augmented DoE

Average Panel Thickness

0.22

0.24

0.26

0.28

0.3

0.32

0.34

Exp #

1Exp

# 2

Exp #

3Exp

# 4

Exp #

5Exp

# 6

Exp #

7Exp

# 8

Exp #

9Exp

# 10

Exp #

11Exp

# 12

Exp #

13Exp

# 14

Exp #

15Exp

# 16

Exp #

17Exp

# 18

Exp #

19Exp

# 20

Exp #

21Exp

# 22

Exp #

23Exp

# 24

Exp #

25Exp

# 23

RExp

# 24

RExp

# 25

RExp

# 22

RExp

# 23

RR

Experimental Number

Ave

rage

Pan

el T

hick

ness

(mm

)

Mean (+) Std Dev (-) Std Dev